[go: up one dir, main page]

WO2025067375A1 - Communication method and apparatus - Google Patents

Communication method and apparatus Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2025067375A1
WO2025067375A1 PCT/CN2024/121580 CN2024121580W WO2025067375A1 WO 2025067375 A1 WO2025067375 A1 WO 2025067375A1 CN 2024121580 W CN2024121580 W CN 2024121580W WO 2025067375 A1 WO2025067375 A1 WO 2025067375A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
session
network slice
message
identifier
network
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Pending
Application number
PCT/CN2024/121580
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
张柔佳
孙飞
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Huawei Technologies Co Ltd
Original Assignee
Huawei Technologies Co Ltd
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Huawei Technologies Co Ltd filed Critical Huawei Technologies Co Ltd
Publication of WO2025067375A1 publication Critical patent/WO2025067375A1/en
Pending legal-status Critical Current
Anticipated expiration legal-status Critical

Links

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W36/00Hand-off or reselection arrangements
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W48/00Access restriction; Network selection; Access point selection
    • H04W48/18Selecting a network or a communication service
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W76/00Connection management
    • H04W76/10Connection setup
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W76/00Connection management
    • H04W76/20Manipulation of established connections
    • H04W76/27Transitions between radio resource control [RRC] states

Definitions

  • the present application relates to the field of communication technology, and in particular to a communication method and device.
  • the fifth generation (5G) mobile communication system proposes to provide users with customized network services through end-to-end network slicing (hereinafter referred to as slicing).
  • a slice can be regarded as a logical subnet, and each slice is isolated from each other, so that targeted services can be provided to users.
  • Network slice selection assistance information (NSSAI) is used to indicate one or more single network slice selection assistance information (Single NSSAI, S-NSSAI) (or S-NSSAI list), and S-NSSAI is used to identify and distinguish different logical subnets.
  • the registration area (RA) of a terminal device includes one or more tracking areas (TA), each of which can provide services corresponding to different slices for the terminal device.
  • TA is the operator's configuration at the cell level. Multiple cells can be configured with the same TA, and a cell can only belong to one TA.
  • the slices supported by the RA of the terminal device can be represented by at least one of the following: Allowed NSSAI, Partially Allowed NSSAI, and/or Partially Rejected NSSAI. Assume that the slice services supported by the cell where the terminal device is currently located include services corresponding to slice 1 and slice 2, and slice 1 belongs to the allowed NSSAI in the RA of the terminal device.
  • a session associated with slice 1 i.e., alternative S-NSSAI
  • the service corresponding to slice 2 i.e., original S-NSSAI
  • the session that is, the original S-NSSAI of the session is inconsistent with the alternative S-NSSAI.
  • the session of the terminal device needs to be migrated from the management device of the source cell to the management device of the target cell.
  • the target cell can provide the service corresponding to the replacement S-NSSAI and cannot provide the service corresponding to the original S-NSSAI, how the target cell performs session migration processing on the session needs further study.
  • the embodiments of the present application provide a communication method and apparatus for improving the accuracy of session switching and improving communication efficiency when the original S-NSSAI and the replacement S-NSSAI of the session are inconsistent.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication method, the method comprising: a first device receives a switching request from a second device; the switching request is used to request to switch a first session to the first device; the network slice associated with the first session is the first network slice, and the first session is used to provide a terminal device with a service corresponding to the second network slice; the first device is a management device of a first cell, and the list of network slices supported by the first cell includes an identifier of the first network slice, but does not include an identifier of the second network slice; the first device receives first information from the second device; the first information is used to indicate that the processing method for the first session is to deny access or deactivate.
  • the first device when the first device receives a switching request, it also receives first information from the second device; when the network slice list supported by the first cell corresponding to the first device does not include the network slice actually served by the first session (the second network slice, i.e., the original S-NSSAI), the first information indicates that the processing method for the first session is to deny access or deactivate; thereby, the first device can process the first session according to the first information; that is, after the network slice replacement of the session occurs (i.e., the first network slice is different from the second network slice), during the switching process for the session, the first device (i.e., the target base station) can perform access control based on the slice originally associated with the session (i.e., the second network slice), thereby improving the accuracy of session switching and improving communication efficiency.
  • the second network slice i.e., the original S-NSSAI
  • the first device may also deny access to or deactivate the first session based on the first information.
  • the first device can also deny access or deactivate the switching request of the first session based on the first information.
  • the first information directly indicates the processing method of the first session, thereby improving the accuracy of session switching and improving communication efficiency.
  • the first information includes an identifier of the second network slice.
  • the first device can also deny access to or deactivate the first session.
  • the first device can also determine how to handle the first session by itself based on the identifier of the second network slice included in the first information.
  • the first information can indirectly indicate the processing method of the first session, thereby improving the accuracy of session switching and improving communication efficiency.
  • the first information also includes: an identifier of at least one first-class network slice or an identifier of at least one second-class network slice;
  • the first-class network slice is a network slice that is allowed to be used in a part of the registration area of the terminal device, and the second-class network slice is a network slice that is not allowed to be used in a part of the registration area;
  • the first device can also determine that the identifier of at least one first-class network slice includes the identifier of the second network slice; or, the first device can also determine that the identifier of at least one second-class network slice includes the identifier of the second network slice.
  • the first device can also determine whether the network slice actually served by the first session belongs to a network slice allowed for use in a part of the registration area of the terminal device (or a network slice denied for use in a part of the registration area). In this way, when the first information indirectly indicates the processing method of the first session, the first device can further determine the processing method, thereby improving the accuracy of session switching and improving communication efficiency.
  • the second device when the terminal device moves from the second cell to the first cell, the second device is a management device of the second cell, and the third device is a core network device.
  • the second device (the management device of the second cell, or the source base station) can instruct the first device (the management device of the first cell, or the target base station) on how to handle the first session through the first information; for example, in an Xn-based switching scenario, the source base station can instruct the target base station on how to handle the session.
  • the first device may also send a first message to the second device based on the first information; the first message is used to indicate that the first device handles the first session by denying access or deactivating the session; the first device may also send a second message to the third device; the second message is used to indicate that resource establishment of the first session failed.
  • the first device can indicate to the second device, based on the first information, that the processing method for the first session is to deny access or deactivate. Moreover, under the premise that the processing method is to deny access or deactivate, the first device may not establish resources for the first session, and indicate to the third device that the resource establishment of the first session has failed, thereby allowing the first device, the second device, and the third device to reach a consensus on the processing method for the first session, thereby improving communication efficiency.
  • the first device may also send a third message to the second device; the third message is used to indicate that the first device handles the first session as allowing access; the first device may also send a fourth message to the third device based on the first information; the fourth message is used to indicate that resource establishment of the first session failed.
  • the first device can also choose not to establish resources for the first session based on the first information, thereby interrupting the switching process of the first session, and the first device indicates to the third device that the resource establishment of the first session has failed, thereby ensuring that the request corresponding to the switching request of the first session is not executed, thereby improving the accuracy of session switching and improving communication efficiency.
  • the first device may also receive a first response message from the third device; the first response message is used to indicate the release of admission resources for the first session.
  • the first device can receive a response message from the third device, so that the first device can release the access resources of the established first session, thereby reducing resource waste.
  • the first device may also send a third message to the second device; the third message is used to indicate that the first device handles the first session as allowing access; the first device may also send an eighth message to the third device; the eighth message is used to indicate that the resources for the first session are successfully established; the first device may also receive a second response message from the third device, and the second response message is used to indicate the release of the access resources for the first session.
  • the first device may receive an instruction from the third device to release the access resources for the first session. That is to say, in the Xn-based switching scenario, the core network device can also instruct the target base station on the processing mode of the session, thereby interrupting the switching process of the first session, which can improve the accuracy of the session switching and improve the communication efficiency.
  • the specific implementation method of the core network instructing the target base station to process the first session can refer to the discussion of the fourth aspect of the subsequent embodiments of this application, which will not be repeated here.
  • the second device is a core network device.
  • the second device can instruct the first device (the management device of the first cell, or the target base station) on how to handle the first session through the first information; for example, in an NG-based switching scenario, the core network device can instruct the target base station on how to handle the session.
  • the first device may also send a fifth message to the second device based on the first information; the fifth message is used to indicate that the first device handles the first session by denying access or deactivating the session.
  • the first device may also send a sixth message to the second device; the sixth message is used to indicate that the first device handles the first session as allowing access.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication method, the method comprising: a switching request sent by a second device to a first device; the switching request is used to request to switch a first session to the first device; the network slice associated with the first session is the first network slice, and the first session is used to provide the terminal device with a service corresponding to the second network slice; the first device is a management device of a first cell, and the list of network slices supported by the first cell includes an identifier of the first network slice; when the network slice list does not include the identifier of the second network slice, the second device sends first information to the first device; the first information is used to indicate that the processing method for the first session is to deny access or deactivate.
  • the second device can indicate through the first information that the processing method for the first session is to deny access or deactivate, so that the first device can correctly handle the switching request of the first session and improve communication efficiency.
  • the first information also includes an identifier of the second network slice.
  • the first information includes the network slice actually served by the first session (the second network slice, i.e., the original S-NSSAI), so that the first device can determine by itself whether the first cell can support the service corresponding to the replacement S-NSSAI, thereby processing the switching request of the first session.
  • the first information indirectly indicates the processing method of the first session, thereby improving the accuracy of session switching and improving communication efficiency.
  • the first information also includes: an identifier of at least one first-class network slice or an identifier of at least one second-class network slice; the first-class network slice is a network slice that is allowed to be used in part of the registration area of the terminal device, and the second-class network slice is a network slice that is not allowed to be used in part of the registration area.
  • the first information also includes network slices allowed for use in some areas of the registration area (or network slices denied for use in some areas of the registration area). That is, when the first information indirectly indicates the processing method of the first session, the first device can further determine the processing method, thereby improving the accuracy of session switching and improving communication efficiency.
  • the second device when the terminal device moves from the second cell to the first cell, the second device is a management device of the second cell.
  • the second device i.e., the management device of the second cell, or the source base station
  • the first device the management device of the first cell, or the target base station
  • the source base station can instruct the target base station on how to handle the session.
  • the second device can also receive second information from the terminal device; the second information includes an identifier of a second network slice; the second network slice is a network slice that is allowed to be used in a part of the registration area of the terminal device, or the second network slice is a network slice that is not allowed to be used in a part of the registration area.
  • the terminal device can determine the original S-NSSAI (i.e., the second network slice) corresponding to the first session, and can also determine that the original S-NSSAI is a network slice that is allowed (or not allowed) to be used in a part of the registration area of the terminal device; accordingly, the second device can obtain the second network slice through the terminal device, thereby determining how to handle the switching request for the first session.
  • the original S-NSSAI i.e., the second network slice
  • the third device is a core network device, and the second device can also receive third information from the third device; the third information includes an identifier of the second network slice, and the third information also includes an identifier of at least one first-class network slice and/or an identifier of at least one second-class network slice list; the first-class network slice is a network slice that is allowed to be used in part of the registration area of the terminal device, and the second-class network slice is a network slice that is not allowed to be used in part of the registration area; the second device can also determine that the identifier of at least one first-class network slice includes the identifier of the second network slice; or, the second device determines that the identifier of at least one second-class network slice includes the identifier of the second network slice.
  • the core network device can send "the original S-NSSAI (i.e., the second network slice) corresponding to the first session" and "the list of network slices related to the terminal device that are allowed (or not allowed) to be used in part of the registration area of the terminal device” to the second device through the third information; accordingly, the second device can obtain the third information to determine how to handle the switching request for the first session.
  • the original S-NSSAI i.e., the second network slice
  • the second device may also receive a first message from the first device; the first message is used to indicate that the first device handles the first session by denying admission or deactivating the session.
  • the second device can receive the first message, that is, receive the processing method of the first session by the first device, so that the processing method of the first session can be agreed upon between the first device and the second device, thereby improving communication efficiency.
  • the second device may also receive a third message from the first device; the third message is used to indicate that the first device handles the first session as allowing access.
  • the second device can receive the third message, that is, receive the first device's processing method for the first session as allowing access, so that a consensus is reached between the first device and the second device on the processing method of the first session.
  • the second device can perform the next step according to the third message, such as continuing the switching process of the first session (avoiding missing processing), thereby improving the accuracy of session switching and improving communication efficiency.
  • the second device is a core network device.
  • the core network device can instruct the first device (the management device of the first cell, or the target base station) on how to handle the first session through the first information; for example, in an NG-based switching scenario, the core network device can instruct the target base station on how to handle the session.
  • the second device may also determine that the second network slice is a network slice that is allowed to be used in a partial area of the registration area of the terminal device; or, the second device determines that the second network slice is a network slice that is not allowed to be used in a partial area of the registration area.
  • the second device can determine whether the network slice actually served by the first session belongs to a network slice allowed for use in part of the registration area of the terminal device (or a network slice denied for use in part of the registration area), thereby further determining the processing method for the first session, improving the accuracy of session switching, and improving communication efficiency.
  • the second device may also receive a fifth message from the first device; the fifth message is used to indicate that the first device handles the first session by denying admission or deactivating the session.
  • the second device can receive the fifth message, that is, receive the first device's processing method for the first session (denying access or deactivating), so that the processing method for the first session can reach a consensus between the first device and the second device, thereby improving communication efficiency.
  • the second device may also receive a sixth message from the first device; the sixth message is used to indicate that the first device handles the first session as allowing access.
  • the second device can receive the sixth message, that is, receive the first device's processing method for the first session (allowing access), so that the processing method for the first session can reach a consensus between the first device and the second device, and the second device can perform the next step according to the sixth message, such as continuing the switching process of the first session (avoiding missing processing), thereby improving the accuracy of session switching and improving communication efficiency.
  • the fourth device when the terminal device moves from the third cell to the first cell, the fourth device is the management device of the third cell, and the second device can also receive a handover request from the fourth device; the second device can also send a third response message to the fourth device; the third response message is used to indicate the release of the admission resources of the first session.
  • the admission resources of the first session in the fourth device can be the resources that the base station has allocated for the first session.
  • the second device can receive a switching request from the fourth device (the management device of the third cell, or the source base station) and instruct the fourth device to release the access resources of the first session, thereby reducing resource waste. It can also enable the core network device and the source base station to reach a consensus on the processing method of the first session, thereby improving the accuracy of session switching and improving communication efficiency.
  • the fourth device when the terminal device moves from the third cell to the first cell, the fourth device is a management device of the third cell, and the second device can also receive the first information from the fourth device.
  • the fourth device (the management device of the third cell, or the source base station) can send the first information to the first device (the management device of the first cell, or the source base station) by transparently transmitting through the second device (core network device), thereby indicating how to handle the switching request for the first session of the first device.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication method, the method comprising: a third device receives an eighth message from a first device; the eighth message is used to indicate that resources for a first session are successfully established; the network slice associated with the first session is the first network slice, and the first session is used to provide a service corresponding to a second network slice to a terminal device; the first device is a management device of a first cell, and a list of network slices supported by the first cell includes an identifier of the first network slice; when the network slice list does not include an identifier of the second network slice, the third device sends a second response message to the first device; the second response message is used to indicate the release of access resources for the first session; the third device is a core network device.
  • the third device may also instruct the first device to release the access resources of the first session, thereby interrupting the switching process of the first session, so as to improve the accuracy of session switching and improve communication efficiency.
  • the specific implementation method of the core network device instructing the target base station to handle the first session can refer to the discussion of the fourth aspect of the subsequent embodiments of this application, which will not be repeated here.
  • the third device determines that the second network slice is a network slice that is allowed to be used in a part of the registration area of the terminal device; or, the third device determines that the second network slice is a network slice that is not allowed to be used in a part of the registration area.
  • the third device can further determine whether the network slice actually served by the first session belongs to a network slice allowed for use in part of the registration area of the terminal device (or a network slice denied for use in part of the registration area), thereby improving the accuracy of session switching and improving communication efficiency.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication method, the method comprising: a fifth device receives a switching request, the switching request is used to request to switch a second session to a sixth device; the network slice associated with the second session is a first network slice, and the second session is used to provide a service corresponding to the second network slice to the terminal device; the fifth device is a core network device; the sixth device is a management device of a first cell, and the list of network slices supported by the first cell includes an identifier of the first network slice; when the network slice list does not include an identifier of the second network slice, the fifth device deactivates the second session.
  • the fifth device can deactivate the second session, thereby interrupting the switching process of the second session, thereby improving the accuracy of session switching and improving communication efficiency.
  • the fifth device may also determine that the second network slice is a network slice that is allowed to be used in a partial area of the registration area of the terminal device; or, the fifth device may also determine that the second network slice is a network slice that is not allowed to be used in a partial area of the registration area.
  • the fifth device can further determine whether the network slice actually served by the second session belongs to a network slice allowed for use in a part of the registration area of the terminal device (or a network slice denied for use in a part of the registration area), thereby improving the accuracy of session switching and improving communication efficiency.
  • the fifth device may deactivate the second session in the following manner: the fifth device may receive a seventh message from the sixth device; the seventh message is used to indicate that the sixth device preprocesses the second session to allow access; when the network slice list does not include the identifier of the second network slice, the fifth device may deactivate the second session in response to the seventh message.
  • the fifth device can also determine to deactivate the second session based on the network slice list, thereby improving the accuracy of session switching and improving communication efficiency.
  • the fifth device may also send fourth information to the sixth device; the fourth information is used to indicate the release of access resources for the second session.
  • the fifth device can instruct the sixth device to release the access resources of the second session through the fourth information, thereby reducing resource waste.
  • the fifth device when the switching request is used to request switching of the second session from the seventh device to the sixth device, the fifth device may also receive a switching request from the seventh device, and the fifth device may also send fifth information to the seventh device, where the fifth information is used to indicate the release of resources allocated by the aforementioned seventh device for the second session.
  • the sixth device can instruct the seventh device (source base station) to release the resources allocated for the second session, thereby reducing resource waste.
  • the present application further provides a communication device.
  • the communication device can execute the above method design.
  • the communication device can be a chip or circuit capable of executing the function corresponding to the above method, or a device including the chip or circuit.
  • the communication device includes a communication unit for receiving and sending data; the communication device also includes a processing unit for implementing the steps in the above method.
  • the above functions can be implemented by hardware, or by hardware executing corresponding software.
  • the hardware or software includes one or more units corresponding to the above functions.
  • the present application further provides a communication device.
  • the communication device can execute the above method design.
  • the communication device includes: a memory for storing computer executable program code; and a processor, the processor being coupled to the memory.
  • the program code stored in the memory includes instructions, and when the processor executes the instructions, the communication device or a device equipped with the communication device executes the method in any possible design above.
  • the communication device may further include a communication interface; or, if the communication device is a chip or a circuit, the communication interface may be an input/output interface of the chip, such as an input/output pin.
  • the present application provides a communication system, which includes a first device that executes the first aspect, and/or one or more devices in a second device that executes the second aspect.
  • the communication system may further include a third device and/or a fourth device.
  • the present application provides a communication system, comprising one or more devices in the fifth device, the sixth device, and/or the seventh device that execute the fourth aspect.
  • the present application provides a computer-readable storage medium, wherein the computer-readable storage medium stores a computer program, and when the computer program runs on a device, it executes the method in any one of the possible designs described above.
  • the present application provides a computer program product, which includes a computer program.
  • the computer program runs on a device, it executes the method in any possible design described above.
  • the present application provides a chip comprising a processor and a memory; the processor is coupled to the memory and is used to read a computer program stored in the memory and execute a method in any possible design described above.
  • FIG1 is a structural diagram of a communication system provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG2 is a schematic diagram of a communication scenario provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG3 is a schematic diagram of another communication scenario provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG4 is a schematic diagram of another communication scenario provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG5 is a flow chart of a communication method provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG6 is a flow chart of another communication method provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG7 is a flow chart of another communication method provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG8 is a flow chart of a communication method provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG9 is a schematic diagram of a flow chart of another communication method provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG10 is a schematic diagram of a flow chart of another communication method provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG11 is an exemplary diagram of a communication method provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG12 is an exemplary diagram of another communication method provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG13 is a schematic diagram of the structure of a communication device provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG14 is a schematic diagram of the structure of another communication device provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • TA is a concept established for the location management of terminal devices. Both terminal devices and core network devices can obtain the TA of the terminal device. TA is an operator's configuration at the cell level. Multiple cells can be configured with the same TA, and a cell can only belong to one TA. Each TA can be indicated by a tracking area code (TAC) or a tracking area identity (TAI), where TAI is composed of a public land mobile network (PLMN) identity and a TAC.
  • TAC tracking area code
  • TAI tracking area identity
  • RA is a range determined by the core network device for the terminal device when the terminal device registers.
  • the core network can track the terminal device within the RA.
  • RA may include one or more TAs, and each RA may be indicated by the identifier of the TA it contains, such as TAC/TAI.
  • TAC/TAI TAC/TAI.
  • RA ⁇ TAC#1, TAC#2 ⁇ , which means: RA includes the TA identified by TAC#1 and the TA identified by TAC#2.
  • the core network device may indicate the RA of the terminal device by sending a registration accept message to the terminal device.
  • the physical network can be abstractly divided into multiple slices. Each slice constitutes an end-to-end logical subnet. Different slices are logically isolated. Each slice can flexibly provide one or more network services according to demand and will not affect other slices.
  • Each S-NSSAI can include at least one of the following: slice/service type (SST), slice differentiator (SD).
  • SST can indicate slice-specific characteristics and service types; SD, as a supplement to SST, can further distinguish multiple slice instances that meet the same SST, and SD is optional.
  • S-NSSAI may be used to indicate a slice
  • NSSAI is an S-NSSAI list, which may include one or more S-NSSAIs, that is, one or more slices.
  • the slice list supported by a cell is pre-configured by the operation administration and maintenance (OAM) device according to the TA granularity.
  • OAM operation administration and maintenance
  • the base station can report the pre-configured slice list to the core network device when establishing an NG interface with the core network device; that is, the support for slices on the base station side is in line with TA homogeneous deployment, and all cells in a specific TA support the same slices.
  • the base station can also support centralized unit (CU)/distributed unit (DU) separation, further, the DU needs to first send the S-NSSAI list supported by each TA to the CU, and then the CU reports it to the core network device.
  • CU centralized unit
  • DU distributed unit
  • the types of NSSAI may include the following seven types:
  • the requested NSSAI may be carried in a registration request message.
  • the second type: Allowed NSSAI may include the S-NSSAI allowed by the network side in the requested NSSAI of the terminal device.
  • the allowed NSSAI may be indicated by the allowed NSSAI (Allowed NSSAI) information element in the registration accept message.
  • the allowed NSSAI may include network slices allowed for use in all areas in the RA. For example, if the allowed NSSAI includes slice #1, and the RA includes a TA identified by TAC#1, then the network slice allowed for use in the TA identified by TAC#1 is slice #1.
  • the third type: Rejected NSSAI may include the S-NSSAI rejected by the network side in the request NSSAI of the terminal device.
  • the rejected NSSAI may include the network slices rejected for use in all areas of the RA. For example, if the rejected NSSAI includes slice #1, and the RA includes the TA identified by TAC#1, then the network slice rejected for use in the TA identified by TAC#1 is slice #1.
  • the rejected NSSAI may be indicated by the rejected NSSAI (Rejected NSSAI) information element in the registration acceptance message.
  • the rejected NSSAI may also indicate the partially rejected NSSAI in the RA (Rejected S-NSSAI(s) Partially in the RA), that is, the network slices rejected for use in some areas of the RA. For example, if the RA includes the TA identified by TAC#1 and the TA identified by TAC#2, and slice #2 cannot be supported by the TA identified by TAC#1 or slice #2 can only be supported by the TA identified by TAC#2, then the partially rejected NSSAI in the RA includes slice #2.
  • the partially rejected NSSAI in the RA may be indicated by the rejection reason for rejecting the NSSAI.
  • the rejection reason is partial rejection in the RA
  • the terminal device may re-request the corresponding slice service in the area that can support the NSSAI in the RA based on the partially rejected NSSAI in the RA.
  • the fourth type: Partially Allowed NSSAI It may include the S-NSSAI that is partially allowed by the network side in the requested NSSAI of the terminal device.
  • the partially allowed NSSAI may include network slices that are allowed to be used in some areas in the RA. For example, if the RA includes a TA identified by TAC#1 and a TA identified by TAC#2, and slice #2 cannot be supported by the TA identified by TAC#1 or slice #2 can only be supported by the TA identified by TAC#2, then the partially allowed NSSAI includes slice #2.
  • partially allowed NSSAI may be indicated via a Partially Allowed NSSAI element in a Registration Accept message.
  • partially allowed NSSAI and/or partially rejected NSSAI in RA may be used in conjunction with a TA list to indicate network slices allowed and/or rejected in some areas of RA.
  • the TA list may be a list of TAs in RA that can support partially allowed NSSAI and/or partially rejected NSSAI in RA. For example, if RA includes a TA identified by TAC#1 and a TA identified by TAC#2, slice #2 cannot be supported by the TA identified by TAC#1 or slice #2 can only be supported by the TA identified by TAC#2, and the partially allowed NSSAI or partially rejected NSSAI in RA includes slice #2, then the TA list that can support the corresponding NSSAI includes the TA identified by TAC#2.
  • the TA list may also be a list of TAs in RA that cannot support partially allowed NSSAI and/or partially rejected NSSAI in RA.
  • the partially allowed NSSAI or partially rejected NSSAI in RA includes slice #2, then the TA list that cannot support the corresponding NSSAI includes the TA identified by TAC#1.
  • one or more of the allowed NSSAI, the partially allowed NSSAI, and the partially rejected NSSAI in the RA may be Used in conjunction with the service area, it indicates the network slices that are allowed and/or denied in some areas of the RA.
  • the service area may also be referred to as the Network Slice Area of Service (NS-AoS), which is used to indicate the area in the RA where resources are allocated or not allocated for the slice in the corresponding NSSAI, and the area may be an area determined based on the TA and the cell list.
  • NS-AoS Network Slice Area of Service
  • the RA includes a TA identified by TAC#1
  • the TA identified by TAC#1 includes cells #1 to #4
  • slice #2 belongs to an NSSAI that is allowed, partially allowed, or partially denied in the RA
  • the service area for slice #2 includes cells #1, #3, and #4 in the TA identified by TAC#1.
  • the partially allowed NSSAI, the partially denied NSSAI in the RA, and the service area, etc. may also be named by other names as long as the same functions are achieved.
  • Type 6 Default NSSAI: According to the operator's policy, one or more of the user's subscribed NSSAIs may be set as the default NSSAI. If the terminal device does not carry the Allowed NSSAI in the registration request message (registration request), and there is a default NSSAI, the network side will use the default NSSAI to provide services to the terminal device.
  • Configured NSSAI The network side configures the NSSAI for the terminal device to use. After receiving the parameters related to the configured NSSAI, the terminal device can determine which S-NSSAI(s) are available in the current network. The network side will carry the parameters related to the configured NSSAI in the "Configured NSSAI" information element of the registration accept message; if the configuration of the terminal device changes after registration, the network side will carry the parameters related to the configured NSSAI in the configuration update command to update the terminal device; the terminal device will save the corresponding configured NSSAI of each network side in the non-volatile storage space; each PLMN can only be configured with one configured NSSAI at most.
  • Session A connection between a terminal device, access network device, user plane network element, and data network (DN) established by a session management network element in a mobile communication system for a terminal device, and used to transmit user plane data between the terminal device and the DN.
  • a session is, for example, a protocol data unit (PDU) session.
  • PDU protocol data unit
  • the terminal device can establish one or more PDU sessions with the mobile communication system (for example, 5G system), and one or more QoS flows can be established in each PDU session.
  • Each QoS flow is used to transmit data with the same QoS requirement (reliability or latency) in a service.
  • QoS flows can be identified by QoS flow identifiers (QFI).
  • FIG1 shows an architecture diagram of a communication system applicable to an embodiment of the present application, wherein the communication system includes a terminal device, an access network (core network) device, and a core network device.
  • the communication system may include multiple terminal devices and multiple access network devices.
  • Terminal device is a device with wireless transceiver function, which can be deployed on land, including indoors or outdoors, handheld or vehicle-mounted; it can also be deployed on the water (such as ships, etc.); it can also be deployed in the air (such as airplanes, balloons and satellites, etc.).
  • Terminal devices can be mobile phones, tablet computers, computers with wireless transceiver functions, virtual reality (VR) terminals, augmented reality (AR) terminals, wireless terminals in industrial control, wireless terminals in self-driving, wireless terminals in remote medical, wireless terminals in smart grids, wireless terminals in transportation safety, wireless terminals in smart cities, wireless terminals in smart homes, user equipment (UE), etc.
  • Terminal devices can realize the function of user access to the network.
  • Access network equipment is equipment in a wireless network, such as a radio access network (RAN) node or a radio access network device that connects a terminal device to a wireless network.
  • access network equipment include: next-generation base stations (gNodeB, gNB) in 5G, transmission reception points (TRP), evolved Node B (eNB), radio network controller (RNC), Node B (NB), base station controller (BSC), base transceiver station (BTS), home base station (e.g., home evolved NodeB, or home Node B, HNB), base band unit (BBU), wireless fidelity (Wifi) access point (AP), integrated access and backhaul (IAB), etc.
  • next-generation base stations gNodeB, gNB
  • TRP transmission reception points
  • eNB evolved Node B
  • RNC radio network controller
  • NB Node B
  • BSC base station controller
  • BTS base transceiver station
  • home base station e.g., home evolved NodeB, or home Node
  • the access network device may also be an access network device in a future communication system (such as a 6G communication system).
  • a future communication system such as a 6G communication system
  • different cells may provide services corresponding to different network slices for terminal devices, and the access network device is the management device of each cell.
  • the core network equipment provides user connection, user management, and service bearer, and provides an interface to the external network as a bearer network.
  • the core network equipment may include at least one of the following network elements: a mobility management network element, a session management network element, a user plane network element, a data management network element (e.g., a unified data management (UDM) network element), a unified data repository (UDM), and a
  • the network elements include network exposure function (NEF) network element, policy control network element (PCF) network element) or network repository function (NRF) network element.
  • AMF is the main functional unit of the fifth generation (5G) core network, responsible for access control and mobility management capabilities, and ensuring the service continuity of terminal devices during mobility.
  • the mobility management network element can be an access and mobility management function (AMF) network element.
  • AMF access and mobility management function
  • future communications such as the sixth generation (6G)
  • the mobility management network element can still be an AMF network element, or have other names, which are not limited in this application.
  • the SMF is responsible for managing the packet data unit (PDU) session of the terminal device.
  • the PDU session is a channel for transmitting PDU.
  • the terminal device needs to transmit PDU to each other with the DN through the PDU session.
  • the PDU session is established, maintained and deleted by the SMF network element.
  • the functions of the session management network element include: session management (such as session establishment, modification and release, including tunnel maintenance between user plane network elements and access network devices), selection and control of user plane network elements, service and session continuity (SSC) mode selection, roaming, etc.
  • the session management network element can be a session management function (SMF) network element.
  • SMF session management function
  • the session management network element can still be an SMF network element, or a network element with other names but with all or part of the functions of a session management network element. This application does not limit it.
  • the management devices i.e., access network devices
  • the management devices may need to switch and/or release the sessions associated with the network slices.
  • a terminal device that has signed up for a slice service when a terminal device that has signed up for a slice service initially joins the network, it can initiate a registration request for a specific network slice by carrying the Requested NSSAI in the radio resource control (RRC) setup complete message.
  • RRC radio resource control
  • the core network device After the aforementioned RRC setup complete message is transparently transmitted to the core network side via the base station (the base station does not parse the registration request), the core network device combines the subscription information of the terminal device in the unified data management (UDM) network element (i.e., subscribed NSSAI) to determine whether the network side (including the RAN side and the core network side) can provide services for the network slice service.
  • UDM unified data management
  • the communication methods between devices for providing services corresponding to the network slice include the following methods A, B and C.
  • the core network device If the core network device confirms that the current network can support the service corresponding to the Requested NSSAI, it will return the Allowed NSSAI and the RA range of the terminal device (indicated by the TAC/TAI list) to the terminal device through a registration request message (registration request); if the core network device confirms that the current network cannot support some or all of the S-NSSAI(s) in the Requested NSSAI, it will return the Allowed NSSAI and/or Rejected NSSAI (i.e., the S-NSSAI(s) in the Requested NSSAI that cannot be supported by the current network) and the RA range of the terminal device to the terminal device through a registration accept message. Accordingly, when the terminal device moves within the RA range, the terminal device cannot re-initiate a registration request for the Rejected NSSAI.
  • the cells in the TA identified by TAC#1 only support slice #1; the cells in the TA identified by TAC#2 support slice #1 and slice #2.
  • the RA of the terminal device includes the TA identified by TAC#1, and does not include the TA identified by TAC#2.
  • “ ⁇ ” in this application represents a list
  • the terminal device moves within the RA, it cannot initiate a registration request for slice #2 again.
  • the terminal device can initiate a session establishment request to the core network device based on the Allowed NSSAI (the non-access stratum (NAS) message can be transparently transmitted through the base station).
  • the core network device determines that it can support the session, it sends a session resource establishment request to the management device of the current cell of the terminal device (such as the base station), that is, one session is associated with one network slice (that is, the S-NSSAI associated with the network slice).
  • the base station determines and determines that resources can be allocated for the current session, it creates at least one corresponding DRB resource on the air interface.
  • the base station side can implement handover admission control based on network slices. For example, when a terminal device needs to perform inter-station handover, the source base station will send the established session and its associated network slice to the target base station; then, the target base station can decide whether to accept the admission of the above session based on its own support for network slices; if there is a PDU that the target base station does not support, If the target base station refuses to admit the PDU session, the source base station will release the resources corresponding to the session after the terminal device switches to the target base station. In other words, after the cell where the terminal device is currently located switches to the target base station, the PDU session is released on both the source base station and the target base station.
  • sessions in mode A can only be associated with Allowed NSSAI.
  • the network slices supported by the RA of the terminal device may be represented by at least one of the following: allowing NSSAI, partially allowing NSSAI, and/or partially rejecting NSSAI.
  • the scope of the RA of the terminal device can be expanded, so that when the terminal device switches to a TA that supports partially allowing NSSAI (or partially rejecting NSSAI), the terminal device can re-initiate a registration request for partially allowing NSSAI (or partially rejecting NSSAI), so that a session associated with partially allowing NSSAI (or partially rejecting NSSAI) can be established.
  • the cells within the TA identified by TAC#1 support slice #1
  • the cells within the TA identified by TAC#2 support slice #1 and slice #2.
  • the RA of the terminal device includes the TA identified by TAC#1 and the TA identified by TAC#2; slice #2 can be supported by the TA identified by TAC#2/cannot be supported by the TA identified by TAC#1.
  • the terminal device moves within the current RA, for example, when it moves to the TA identified by TAC#2, it can initiate a registration request for slice #2 again.
  • a terminal device establishes a session associated with partially allowed NSSAI (or partially rejected NSSAI) in a TA (including the cell corresponding to the source base station) that can support partially allowed NSSAI (or partially rejected NSSAI); then, the terminal device moves from the source base station to the target base station, and the cell corresponding to the target base station is located in a TA that cannot support partially allowed NSSAI (or partially rejected NSSAI), then the previously established session will not be supported, and therefore the user plane resources of the session should be deactivated, that is, the target base station can deny access to the session or deactivate/suspend it.
  • the network slice replacement process may be executed, that is, a session associated with slice #1 (that is, the replacement S-NSSAI) is established, and the service corresponding to slice #2 (that is, the original S-NSSAI) is provided through the session.
  • the original S-NSSAI of the session is inconsistent with the replacement S-NSSAI.
  • the core network device sends a mapping relationship between the original S-NSSAI and the replacement S-NSSAI to the terminal device.
  • the time for the core network device to send the aforementioned mapping relationship to the terminal device is not limited (it does not necessarily need to rely on the session to establish the original S-NSSAI to trigger).
  • the core network device can also add the replacement S-NSSAI to the allowed NSSAI and/or configured NSSAI of the terminal device.
  • the terminal device After receiving the aforementioned mapping relationship, the terminal device can initiate a session based on the original S-NSSAI; in the process of initiating the session, it is necessary to carry the original S-NSSAI and the replacement S-NSSAI in the session establishment request.
  • the AMF network element in the core network device After receiving the session establishment request, the AMF network element in the core network device can send both of the above two S-NSSAIs to the SMF network element; the SMF network element can determine to establish a session associated with the replacement S-NSSAI. That is, the network slice replacement process is completed.
  • the terminal device moves from the source cell (i.e., the current service cell managed by the source base station) to the target cell (i.e., the target service cell managed by the target base station), and during the session migration (i.e., session switching) of the terminal device, the following situation may occur:
  • the target cell can provide the service corresponding to the replacement S-NSSAI but cannot provide the service corresponding to the original S-NSSAI
  • the management device of the target cell cannot clearly know how to perform session migration processing on the session.
  • session migration is session switching
  • the session migration process is the session switching process
  • the session migration processing is the session switching processing.
  • the RA of the terminal device ⁇ TAC#1, TAC#2 ⁇ , the cells in the TA identified by TAC#1 support slice #1, and the cells in the TA identified by TAC#2 support slice #1 and slice #2.
  • the terminal device when the terminal device is located in the TA identified by TAC#2 (including the source cell), the terminal device can request to establish a session with the replacement S-NSSAI as slice #1 and the original S-NSSAI as slice #2; after the core network device completes the network slice replacement process, it instructs the source cell to establish a session associated with slice #1.
  • the source base station With the movement of the terminal device, when the terminal device is located in the TA identified by TAC#1 (including the target cell), the source base station needs to migrate the established session with the target base station.
  • the target base station when it receives a handover request for a session, it can obtain the network slice associated with the session (i.e., replace the S-NSSAI); accordingly, the target base station may determine whether the TA to which it belongs supports the replacement S-NSSAI, thereby determining whether to perform admission processing on the session.
  • the network slice associated with the session is slice #1
  • the target base station is in the TA identified by TAC #1
  • the TA identified by TAC #1 can support slice #1, so the target base station can perform admission processing on the session.
  • the session actually provides the service corresponding to slice #2, the TA where the target base station is located cannot support slice #2.
  • the target base station performs admission processing on the session based on slice #2, the session should be denied admission or deactivated/suspended.
  • the target base station is not clear about the migration processing of the session during the handover process, which results in the target base station being unable to implement standardized admission control for network slices, and the accuracy of session switching is low.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication method, which can be implemented in the communication system shown in the aforementioned FIG. 1 .
  • FIG5 is a schematic diagram of a communication method provided in an embodiment of the present application, the method comprising the following steps:
  • the second device sends a handover request to the first device, the handover request is used to request to handover the first session to the first device; the network slice associated with the first session is the first network slice, and the first session is used to provide the terminal device with services corresponding to the second network slice; the first device is a management device of the first cell, and the list of network slices supported by the first cell includes the identifier of the first network slice. Accordingly, the first device receives the handover request from the second device; the handover request is used to request to handover the first session to the first device.
  • the handover request can be carried in the handover request signaling.
  • the access network device is the management device of each cell.
  • the first device may be any access network device in the communication system.
  • the terminal device can interact with the source base station to implement the establishment process of the first session, or the source base station interacts with the previous base station that provides the service corresponding to the first session to implement the switching process of the first session, so that the terminal device can implement the service processing related to the first session through the source base station.
  • the access network device in the communication system includes a source base station; the terminal device can also obtain the mapping relationship between the original S-NSSAI (i.e., the second network slice) and the replacement S-NSSAI (i.e., the first network slice) from the AMF network element of the core network device.
  • the terminal device accesses the source base station, when the resources of the second network slice are congested or unavailable on the core network side, the terminal device can send a NAS message to the AMF network element, and the NAS message is used to request the establishment of a first session, which is associated with the first network slice and provides services corresponding to the second network slice.
  • the AMF network element After receiving the NAS message, the AMF network element sends the identifier of the first network slice and the identifier of the second network slice to the SMF network element; when the SMF network element determines to establish the first session based on the identifiers of the two network slices, the AMF network element instructs the source base station to prepare resources related to the first session, thereby establishing the first session.
  • the AMF network element can instruct the source base station through NGAP signaling (for example, PDU session resources setup request).
  • step S501 when the terminal device moves and leaves the current cell, the operation of step S501 is triggered.
  • step S502 When the list of network slices supported by the first cell does not include the identifier of the second network slice, the second device sends a first message to the first device.
  • the first information is used to indicate that the processing method for the first session is to deny access or deactivate.
  • the first device receives the first information from the second device.
  • the first information may be carried in a handover request signaling. It should be understood that the handover request in step S501 and the first information in step S502 may be carried in the same handover request signaling, that is, the second device may send the handover request and the first information to the first device.
  • a session may be a PDU session.
  • the state of a PDU session may be in two stable states: active or inactive.
  • active state Generally speaking, a successfully established PDU session is in an active state, and a successfully released PDU session is in an inactive state.
  • the inactive state may also be referred to as a deactivated state.
  • the "deactivation" processing method described in the embodiments of the present application can also be replaced by a "suspend" processing method for the session, which does not affect the implementation of the communication method in the embodiments of the present application.
  • the second device before the second device sends the first information to the first device, it can also determine whether the second network slice is a network slice that is allowed to be used in a part of the registration area of the terminal device or a network slice that is not allowed to be used in a part of the registration area.
  • step S501 and step S502 after the network slice of a session is replaced (i.e., the first network slice is different from the second network slice), during the switching process for the session, the first device (i.e., the target base station) can perform access control based on the slice originally associated with the session (i.e., the second network slice), thereby improving the accuracy of session switching and improving communication efficiency.
  • the first device i.e., the target base station
  • the first device may deny access to or deactivate the first session according to the first information.
  • the first information directly indicates the processing method for the first session, which can improve the accuracy of session switching and improve communication efficiency.
  • the aforementioned first information may include an identifier of the second network slice.
  • the first device denies access to or deactivates the first session.
  • the first information can also indirectly indicate the processing method for the first session, which can improve the accuracy of session switching and improve communication efficiency.
  • the aforementioned first information may also include: an identifier of at least one first-class network slice or an identifier of at least one second-class network slice; the first-class network slice is a network slice that is allowed to be used in part of the registration area of the terminal device, and the second-class network slice is a network slice that is not allowed to be used in part of the registration area.
  • the first device may also determine that the identifier of at least one first-class network slice includes the identifier of the second network slice; or, the first device may also determine that the identifier of at least one second-class network slice includes the identifier of the second network slice. In this way, the first device can further determine how to handle the first session, thereby improving the accuracy of session switching and improving communication efficiency.
  • the interaction between access network devices can be achieved through XnAP signaling
  • the interaction between core network devices and access network devices can be achieved through NGAP signaling.
  • the specific signaling and signal elements in the specific implementation methods below are all examples and are not limited in this application.
  • the second device in the aforementioned steps S501 to S502 is the management device of the second cell
  • the third device is the core network device.
  • the second device can be any access network device in the communication system, and the second device is different from the first device; the third device can be a core network device in the communication system. Accordingly, the interaction between the first device and the second device can be achieved through XnAP signaling, and the interaction between the first device and the third device can be achieved through NGAP signaling.
  • the specific signaling and information elements in the specific implementation methods below are examples, and this application does not limit them.
  • the second device may also obtain the identifier of the second network slice, that is, obtain the original S-NSSAI of the session.
  • the specific acquisition method may include the following method a and method b.
  • Method a The second device receives second information from the terminal device; the second information includes an identifier of a second network slice; the second network slice is a network slice that is allowed to be used in a part of the registration area of the terminal device, or the second network slice is a network slice that is not allowed to be used in a part of the registration area.
  • the second information can be carried in an RRC message.
  • the RRC message sent by the terminal device to the AMF network element carries a NAS request message, and the NAS request message is used to request to establish the first session; the RRC message can also carry the original S-NSSAI of the first session.
  • the terminal device has determined that the original S-NSSAI (i.e., the second network slice) is a network slice that is allowed to be used in part of the registration area of the terminal device or a network slice that is not allowed to be used in part of the registration area.
  • Method b The second device receives third information from the third device; the third information includes an identifier of the second network slice, for example, the third information includes: the original S-NSSAI of the first session is the second network slice; the third information may also include an identifier of at least one first-class network slice and/or an identifier of at least one second-class network slice list; the first-class network slice is a network slice that is allowed to be used in a part of the registration area of the terminal device, and the second-class network slice is a network slice that is not allowed to be used in a part of the registration area.
  • the second device can also determine that the identifier of at least one first-type network slice includes the identifier of the second network slice; or, the second device determines that the identifier of at least one second-type network slice includes the identifier of the second network slice.
  • the third information may be carried in NGAP signaling (e.g., initial context setup request signaling).
  • NGAP signaling e.g., initial context setup request signaling
  • the second device may also obtain a list of network slices supported by the first cell, that is, a list of network slices supported by the TA where the first cell is located.
  • the second device obtains the network slice list through XnAP signaling interaction.
  • the second device can combine the second information obtained by the aforementioned method a or the third information obtained by the aforementioned method b, and the network slice list supported by the first cell to determine that the network slice list supported by the first cell does not include the identifier of the second network slice.
  • the subsequent operation of the aforementioned step S502 includes any one of the following methods: method 1, method 2, method 3, and method 4.
  • Method 1 The first device sends a first message to the second device according to the first information; the first message is used to indicate that the first device handles the first session by denying access or deactivating; the first device sends a second message to the third device; the second message is used to indicate that the resource establishment of the first session failed.
  • the third device receives the second message from the first device.
  • the resource indicated in the resource establishment failure may be a radio bearer (e.g., a data radio bearer (DRB)) resource corresponding to the first session.
  • DRB data radio bearer
  • the first device receives a first response message from the third device; the first response message is used to indicate the release of admission resources (eg, DRB resources) of the first session.
  • admission resources eg, DRB resources
  • the first message may be carried in XnAP signaling, for example, in a PDU session resources not admitted list (PDU session resources not admitted list) cell in a handover request acknowledgment signaling.
  • the second message may be carried in NGAP signaling, for example, in a PDU session resource failed to setup list (PDU session resource failed to setup list) cell in a path switch request (path switch request) signaling.
  • the first response message is carried in NGAP signaling (for example, a path switch request acknowledgment signaling), which is used to notify the first device of sessions whose user plane paths have been successfully switched and/or sessions whose user plane path switching fails and whose admission resources need to be released.
  • the first device will indicate in the XnAP signaling replied to the second device according to the first information (for example, through a first message indication) that the first session is denied access or deactivated; since the first session is processed by denying access or deactivation, the first device may not establish access resources for the first session, and send a message (second message) to the third device to indicate that resource establishment for the first session failed.
  • the first information for example, through a first message indication
  • Mode 2 The first device sends a third message to the second device; the third message is used to indicate that the first device handles the first session as allowing access; the first device sends a fourth message to the third device based on the first information; the fourth message is used to indicate that the resource establishment of the first session failed.
  • the third device receives the fourth message from the first device.
  • the resource indicated in the resource establishment failure may be a radio bearer (e.g., DRB) resource corresponding to the first session.
  • DRB radio bearer
  • the first device receives a first response message from the third device; the first response message is used to indicate the release of admission resources (eg, DRB resources) of the first session.
  • admission resources eg, DRB resources
  • the third message may be carried in the PDU session resources admitted list cell in the handover request acknowledge signaling.
  • the fourth message may be carried in the PDU session resource failed to setup list cell of the path switch request signaling.
  • the first response message is carried in NGAP signaling (e.g., path switch request acknowledge signaling), which is used to notify the first device of the session corresponding to the user plane path that has been successfully switched.
  • the first device indicates in the XnAP signaling (third message) replied to the second device that the first session is allowed access; in addition, the first device may not establish access resources for the first session according to the instructions of the first information, and send a message (fourth message) to the third session to indicate that the resource establishment of the first session failed, which can also ultimately achieve the denial of access or deactivation of the first session.
  • Method three The first device deactivates the first session according to the first information, or ignores the processing requirements for the first session, and does not establish access resources (such as DRB resources); accordingly, the first device does not carry information related to the first session in the subsequent handover request-related messages (including handover request acknowledgment signaling) sent to the second device.
  • the first device also does not carry information related to the first session in the subsequent handover request-related messages (including path switch request signaling) sent to the third device.
  • the handover request acknowledgment signaling sent by the first device to the second device includes a PDU session resources not admitted list element and a PDU session resources admitted list element, but the aforementioned PDU session resources not admitted list element and PDU session resources admitted list element do not include the identifier of the first session.
  • the path switch request signaling sent by the first device to the third device includes a PDU session resource switching list (PDU session resource switched list) and a PDU session resource failed to setup list, but the aforementioned PDU session resource switched list and the aforementioned PDU session resource failed to setup list do not include an identifier of the first session.
  • the first device may send a first message to the second device (reference method one); or, the first device may also send a third message to the second device (reference method two).
  • the first device after receiving the first information, the first device does not process any subsequent operations of the first session, as an implementation approach of denying access, thereby interrupting the switching process of the first session.
  • the first device may also send a third message to the second device; the third message is used to instruct the first device to process the first session The method is to allow access.
  • the first device may also send an eighth message to the third device; the eighth message is used to indicate that the resources of the first session are successfully established; accordingly, the third device receives the eighth message from the first device.
  • the third device may also send a second response message to the first device, and the second response message is used to indicate the release of the access resources of the first session; accordingly, the first device receives the second response message from the third device.
  • the third device may also make a judgment on the network slice (i.e., the second network slice) actually providing services for the first session and the list of network slices supported by the first cell.
  • the judgment process may refer to the actions performed by the fifth device (i.e., the core network device) shown in subsequent steps S801 to S802 of this application, which will not be repeated here.
  • the judgment process may include: the third device determines that the second network slice is a network slice that is allowed to be used in part of the registration area of the terminal device; or the third device determines that the second network slice is a network slice that is not allowed to be used in part of the registration area.
  • the first device may receive an instruction from the third device to release the access resources for the first session, thereby interrupting the switching process of the first session.
  • the second device in the aforementioned steps S501 to S502 is a core network device. Accordingly, the interaction between the first device and the second device can be implemented through NGAP signaling, and the specific signaling and information elements in the following specific implementation methods are all examples, and this application does not limit them.
  • the second device may also receive a switching request from the source base station; before executing step S502, the second device may also determine that the second network slice is a network slice that is allowed to be used in a part of the registration area of the terminal device; or, the second device may also determine that the second network slice is a network slice that is not allowed to be used in a part of the registration area.
  • the subsequent operations of the aforementioned step S502 include the following method 1 and method 2.
  • Mode 1 The first device sends a fifth message to the second device according to the first information; the fifth message is used to indicate that the first device handles the first session by denying access or deactivating the session.
  • the fifth message can be carried in the PDU session resource failed to setup list element in the handover request acknowledgement signaling.
  • Mode 2 The first device sends a sixth message to the second device; the sixth message is used to indicate that the first device should allow access to the first session.
  • the sixth message can be carried in the PDU session resources admitted list element in the handover request acknowledgment signaling.
  • the first device indicates in the NGAP signaling (sixth message) replied to the second device that the first session is allowed to be admitted; in addition, the first device may not establish the admission resources (such as DRB resources) of the first session according to the instructions of the first information, and in fact may also realize the refusal of admission or deactivation of the first session.
  • the admission resources such as DRB resources
  • the fourth device is the management device of the third cell.
  • the fourth device can be any access network device in the communication system shown in FIG1 , and the fourth device is different from the first device. Accordingly, the interaction between the first device and the fourth device can be implemented through XnAP signaling, and the specific signaling and information elements in the specific implementation methods below are examples, and this application does not limit them.
  • the second device may also receive a handover request (including a handover request of the first session) from the fourth device; after executing step S502, the second device may also send a third response message to the fourth device, the third response message being used to notify the fourth device of the session (including the first session) that needs to be released.
  • the third response message may be carried in a handover command.
  • the second device may also deactivate the first session.
  • the second device may also make a judgment on the network slice of the first session and the network slice list of the first device.
  • the judgment process may refer to the actions performed by the fifth device (i.e., the core network device) shown in subsequent steps S801 to S802 of this application, which will not be repeated here.
  • the judgment process may include: the second device determines that the second network slice is a network slice that is allowed to be used in a part of the registration area of the terminal device; or the second device determines that the second network slice is a network slice that is not allowed to be used in a part of the registration area.
  • the second device may also receive the first information from the fourth device. That is, after the fourth device determines the first information, The fourth device may transparently transmit the first information to the first device through the second device (eg, the AMF network element in the core network device). Optionally, if the first information is sent by the aforementioned transparent transmission method, the second device does not need to parse the first information.
  • FIG8 is a schematic diagram of another communication method provided in an embodiment of the present application, the method comprising the following steps:
  • the fifth device receives a switching request, where the switching request is used to request that the second session be switched to the sixth device; the network slice associated with the second session is the first network slice, and the second session is used to provide the terminal device with services corresponding to the second network slice; the fifth device is a core network device; the sixth device is a management device of the first cell, and the list of network slices supported by the first cell includes the identifier of the first network slice.
  • the handover request can be carried in the handover request signaling.
  • the access network device is the management device of each cell.
  • the sixth device may be any access network device in the communication system.
  • the terminal device can interact with the source base station, through the establishment process or switching process of the second session, so that the terminal device implements the service processing related to the second session through the source base station.
  • the specific implementation of this design can refer to the description in step S501, which will not be repeated here.
  • step S801 when the terminal device moves and leaves the current cell, the operation of step S801 is triggered.
  • the fifth device may also determine that the second network slice is a network slice that is allowed to be used in a part of the registration area of the terminal device; or, the fifth device may also determine that the second network slice is a network slice that is not allowed to be used in a part of the registration area.
  • the fifth device is a core network device
  • the sixth device is a target base station. Accordingly, the interaction between the fifth device and the source base station can be implemented through XnAP signaling, and the interaction between the fifth device and the sixth device can be implemented through NGAP signaling.
  • the specific signaling and information elements in the following specific implementation methods are examples, and this application does not limit them.
  • the source base station sends a handover request for the second session to the sixth device, and the sixth device performs access permission processing for the second session, for example, the sixth device establishes a radio bearer (e.g., DRB) resource corresponding to the second session.
  • the sixth device may send a fourth response message to the source base station, and the fourth response message is used to indicate that the sixth device pre-processes the second session in a manner that allows access.
  • the fourth response message may be carried in the PDU session resources admitted list element in the handover request acknowledgment signaling.
  • the sixth device may also send a switching request to the fifth device.
  • the sixth device may also send a seventh message to the fifth device; the seventh message is used to indicate that the pre-processing mode of the sixth device for the second session is to allow access.
  • the fifth device may receive the seventh message from the sixth device.
  • the seventh message may be carried in the PDU session resource to be switched in downlink list (PDU session resource to be switched in downlink list) element in the path switch request signaling.
  • the fifth device when the list of network slices supported by the first cell does not include the identifier of the second network slice, the fifth device can deactivate the second session in response to the seventh message. In this way, even if the fifth device receives the pre-processing method of the sixth device for the second session as allowing access, the fifth device can determine to deactivate the second session according to the network slice list, thereby improving the accuracy of session switching and improving communication efficiency.
  • the fifth device may also send fourth information to the sixth device; the fourth information is used to indicate the release of admission resources for the second session.
  • the fourth information can be carried in the PDU session resource released list (PDU session resource released list) element in the path switch request acknowledgement signaling.
  • the seventh device may also send a switching request for one or more sessions (including the second session) to the fifth device; the switching request is used to request that the aforementioned one or more sessions (including the second session) be switched from the seventh device to the sixth device.
  • the seventh device may be a source base station, that is, a management device of the cell where the terminal device is currently located. Accordingly, the interaction between the fifth device and the sixth device may be implemented through NGAP signaling, and the interaction between the fifth device and the seventh device may be implemented through NGAP signaling.
  • the specific signaling in the specific implementation manner described below will be described.
  • the commands and information elements are examples and are not limited in this application.
  • the fifth device may also send a handover request for one or more sessions (excluding the second session) to the sixth device, and the one or more sessions (excluding the second session) are sessions successfully established by the seventh device.
  • the handover request may be carried in a handover request signaling, and the handover request for the one or more sessions may be carried in a PDU session resource setup list (PDU session resource setup list) cell in the handover request signaling.
  • PDU session resource setup list PDU session resource setup list
  • the sixth device may also send a fifth response message to the fifth device; the fifth response message is used to notify the fifth device of a successful session or a failed session of resource establishment, and the fifth response message does not include the second session.
  • the fifth response message is carried in the handover request acknowledgement signaling.
  • the fifth device may also send a sixth response message to the seventh device; the sixth response message is used to notify the seventh device of the session corresponding to the user plane path that has been successfully switched among the one or more sessions mentioned above (excluding the second session) or the session that needs to be released (including the second session).
  • the sixth response message is carried in the handover command signaling.
  • FIG11 is an example diagram of a communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application, which shows a partial implementation of the communication method shown in FIG5 and FIG8, and is applied to the Xn-based switching scenario in the scenario shown in FIG4.
  • the method can be applied to the communication system shown in FIG1.
  • the aforementioned access network device includes a source base station (represented by S-gNB) and a target base station (represented by T-gNB), a terminal device (represented by UE), and the functions of the aforementioned core network device are implemented by AMF network elements and SMF network elements.
  • Step 1 Establish PDU Session #1.
  • the UE After the UE accesses the S-gNB, the UE sends a NAS message to the AMF network element, which is used to request the establishment of a PDU session for slice #2. Since the UE has received the mapping relationship between slice #1 and slice #2, the UE will carry the slice identifiers of slice #1 and slice #2 in the NAS message. After receiving the NAS message sent by the UE, the AMF network element will further send the slice identifiers of slice #1 and slice #2 to the SMF network element. The SMF network element determines to establish the PDU Session #1 associated with slice #1, and the AMF network element instructs the S-gNB to prepare RAN side resources for PDU Session #1 through NGAP signaling (such as PDU session resources setup request signaling).
  • NGAP signaling such as PDU session resources setup request signaling
  • Step 2 The UE moves from the coverage of the S-gNB to the coverage of the T-gNB.
  • S-gNB needs to switch the session corresponding to the UE (including PDU Session#1) to T-gNB.
  • PDU Session#1 PDU Session#1
  • Sol#2 Sol#1 and Sol#2
  • Sol#1 Even if T-gNB can support the slice associated with the PDU session, S-gNB can also instruct T-gNB to deny admission or deactivate (or suspend) the PDU session.
  • the implementation of Sol#1 can refer to the implementation method of the switching scenario based on Xn in Figure 5 above. The specific implementation process of Sol#1 is described as follows.
  • Opt#1 an implementation method including steps 3 to 6, refer to the above-mentioned method 1):
  • Step 3-1 The S-gNB indicates the first session set and the second session set to the T-gNB through XnAP signaling (e.g., handover request signaling); the first session set includes one or more PDU sessions that have been established when the UE accesses the S-gNB; the second session set is used to indicate the sessions in the aforementioned one or more PDU sessions that need to be denied access or deactivated/suspended even if the associated slices can be supported by the T-gNB.
  • the first session set includes PDU Session#1. It should be understood that the first session set can be used to implement the function of the handover request of PDU Session#1.
  • the first session set includes PDU Session#1, which can indicate: "Handover request for at least one session including PDU Session#1"; with reference to the communication method shown in Figure 5 or Figure 6, the second session set is used to implement the function of the first information.
  • the indication method of the second session set can be direct indication or indirect indication.
  • the second session set includes PDU Session#1.
  • the second session set includes the original S-NSSAI of PDU Session#1; for another example, the second session set can also include the UE's partial allowed NSSAI (or partial rejected NSSAI).
  • the T-gNB can determine by itself that even if the associated slice can be supported by the T-gNB, the session still needs to be denied access or deactivated/suspended.
  • the S-gNB may obtain the original S-NSSAI associated with one or more sessions (including PDU Session#1) in the first session set and the UE's partial allowed NSSAI (or partial rejected NSSAI) based on the following Alts (Alt#1 and Alt#2), and obtain a list of network slices that can be supported by the T-gNB, thereby determining the aforementioned second session set.
  • S-gNB obtains the original S-NSSAI of the PDU session from the AMF network element and the UE's partially allowed NSSAI (or partially rejected NSSAI, this possibility will not be repeated later, but the partially allowed NSSAI in the subsequent embodiments can be replaced by partially rejected NSSAI);
  • UE obtains the list of network slices supported by the target cell managed by T-gNB through XnAP signaling interaction. For example, S-gNB obtains the UE's partially allowed NSSAI as slice #2 from the AMF network element, and the original S-NSSAI of PDU Session #1 is also slice #2. Since the list of network slices supported by the target cell does not include slice #2, S-gNB can instruct T-gNB to reject or deactivate/suspend PDU Session #1 through the second session set.
  • Alt#2 When the UE requests to establish a PDU session in step 1, if the original S-NSSAI of the PDU session is a partially allowed NSSAI, the UE can add the original S-NSSAI indication in the RRC message containing the NAS request, so that the S-gNB obtains the original S-NSSAI of the PDU session; the S-gNB obtains the list of network slices supported by the target cell managed by the T-gNB through the XnAP signaling interaction. For example, when the UE requests to establish PDU Session#1 in step 1, the corresponding original S-NSSAI obtained is slice#2, and slice#2 is a partially allowed NSSAI. Since the list of network slices supported by the target cell does not include slice#2, the S-gNB can instruct the T-gNB to reject or deactivate/suspend PDU Session#1 through the second session set.
  • Step 4-1 Even if the T-gNB can support the slice #1 associated with PDU Session #1, it will indicate in the XnAP signaling (e.g., handover request acknowledgment signaling) replied to the S-gNB that PDU Session #1 is denied access.
  • the third session set e.g., PDU session resources not admitted list information element
  • the handover request acknowledgment signaling carries the PDU session identifier (PDU Session ID) of PDU Session #1. It should be understood that, with reference to the communication method shown in FIG. 5 or FIG. 6, the third session set can be used to implement the function of the first message.
  • Step 5-1 T-gNB notifies the AMF network element of the PDU session for which resource preparation failed on the RAN side through the fourth session set in NGAP signaling (e.g., path switch request signaling).
  • the fourth session set (PDU session resource failed to setup list information element) carries the PDU Session ID of PDU Session#1. It should be understood that, with reference to the communication method shown in FIG. 5 or FIG. 6, the fourth session set can be used to implement the function of the second message.
  • Step 6-1 The AMF network element notifies the T-gNB of the user plane path that has been successfully switched through NGAP signaling (e.g., path switch request acknowledgment signaling).
  • NGAP signaling e.g., path switch request acknowledgment signaling
  • the AMF network element may also notify the T-gNB to release the access resources of PDU Session#1, for example, the AMF network element sends the aforementioned first response message to the T-gNB.
  • Step 3-2 The S-gNB indicates the first session set and the second session set to the T-gNB through XnAP signaling (e.g., handover request signaling).
  • XnAP signaling e.g., handover request signaling
  • Step 4-2 T-gNB sets PDU Session #1 as admitted in the XnAP signaling (e.g., handover request acknowledge signaling) in reply to S-gNB, but does not actually prepare RAN side resources for the PDU session.
  • the fifth session set e.g., PDU session resources admitted list IE
  • the handover request acknowledge signaling carries the PDU Session ID of PDU Session #1, but does not establish air interface DRB resources for the PDU session. It should be understood that, with reference to the communication method shown in FIG. 5 or FIG. 6, the fifth session set can be used to implement the function of the third message.
  • Step 5-2 T-gNB notifies the AMF network element of the PDU sessions that have been admitted and the PDU sessions for which the RAN side resource preparation failed through NGAP signaling (e.g., path switch request signaling).
  • NGAP signaling e.g., path switch request signaling
  • Step 6-2 The AMF network element notifies the T-gNB of the user plane path that has been successfully switched through NGAP signaling (e.g., path switch request acknowledge signaling).
  • the AMF network element may also notify the T-gNB to release the access resources of PDU Session#1, for example, the AMF network element sends the aforementioned first response message to the T-gNB.
  • NGAP signaling e.g., path switch request acknowledge signaling
  • Sol#2 T-gNB admits the PDU session according to the slice associated with the PDU session, and the AMF network element instructs T-gNB to release the resources of the PDU session on the RAN side (i.e., the T-gNB side) or deactivate (or suspend) the PDU session.
  • the implementation of Sol#2 can refer to the implementation method based on the Xn switching scenario in Figure 8 above. The specific implementation process of Sol#2 is described as an example below.
  • Step 3-3 The S-gNB indicates the first session set to the T-gNB through XnAP signaling (e.g., handover request signaling), and the first session set includes PDU Session#1.
  • XnAP signaling e.g., handover request signaling
  • Step 4-3 T-gNB allows PDU Session #1 to be admitted according to slice #1 associated with PDU Session #1, and sets PDU Session #1 as admitted in the reply XnAP signaling (e.g., handover request acknowledge signaling).
  • PDU Session #1 is carried in the sixth session set (e.g., PDU session resources admitted list IE) in the handover request acknowledge signaling.
  • PDU Session ID is carried in the sixth session set (e.g., PDU session resources admitted list IE) in the handover request acknowledge signaling.
  • PDU Session ID PDU Session ID.
  • T-gNB will prepare RAN side resources for PDU Session #1, that is, establish the RAN side resources of the PDU session.
  • the sixth session set can be used to implement the function of the fourth response message.
  • Step 5-3 T-gNB notifies the AMF network element of the PDU session that has been admitted through NGAP signaling (e.g., path switch request signaling), for example, through the seventh session set in the path switch request signaling (e.g., PDU session resource to be switched in downlink list information element) carrying the PDU Session ID of PDU Session #1.
  • NGAP signaling e.g., path switch request signaling
  • the seventh session set can be used to implement the function of the switching request of PDU Session #1 and the function of the seventh message.
  • the seventh session set includes PDU Session #1, which can indicate: "a switching request for at least one session including PDU Session #1, and T-gNB has already performed admission processing on PDU Session #1".
  • Step 6-3 The AMF network element determines that the original S-NSSAI corresponding to PDU Session #1 is slice #2 that T-gNB cannot support; the AMF network element instructs T-gNB to release the RAN side resources prepared for PDU Session #1 through path switch request acknowledge signaling, for example, the PDU Session ID carrying PDU Session #1 in the eighth session set (e.g., PDU session resource released list information element) in the path switch request acknowledge signaling; the AMF network element may also reject or deactivate/suspend PDU Session #1.
  • the eighth session set may be used to implement the function of the fourth information.
  • the AMF network element may further determine that slice #2 partially allows NSSAI (or partially rejects NSSAI) before sending the path switch request acknowledgment signaling.
  • FIG12 is an example diagram of another communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application, which shows a partial implementation of the communication method shown in FIG5 and FIG8, and is applied to the NG switching scenario in the scenario shown in FIG4.
  • the method can be applied to the communication system shown in FIG1.
  • the aforementioned access network equipment includes a source base station (represented by S-gNB) and a target base station (represented by T-gNB), a terminal device (represented by UE), and the functions of the aforementioned core network equipment are implemented by AMF network elements and SMF network elements.
  • Step a Establish PDU Session #1.
  • the specific implementation process can be referred to step 1 and will not be repeated here.
  • Step b The UE moves from the coverage of the S-gNB to the coverage of the T-gNB.
  • Step c The S-gNB indicates the ninth session set (refer to the aforementioned first session set) and/or the tenth session set (refer to the aforementioned second session set) to the AMF network element through NGAP signaling (such as handover required signaling); the ninth session set includes PDU Session#1.
  • the specific implementation process can refer to step 3-1 and will not be repeated here.
  • the aforementioned tenth session set can be transparently transmitted to the T-gNB via the AMF network element. It should be understood that the ninth session set can be used to implement the function of the handover request of PDU Session#1.
  • the ninth session set includes PDU Session#1, which can indicate: "Handover request for at least one session including PDU Session#1"; with reference to the communication method shown in Figure 5, the tenth session set is used to implement the function of the first information.
  • each device handles PDU Session#1 in two different ways (Sol#3 and Sol#4).
  • Sol#3 Even if T-gNB can support the slice associated with the PDU session, T-gNB can also deny admission or deactivate (or suspend) the PDU session based on the instruction of the AMF network element.
  • the implementation of Sol#3 can refer to the implementation method based on the NG switching scenario in Figure 5 above. The specific implementation process of Sol#3 is described as follows.
  • Opt#4 (an implementation method including steps d to f, refer to the above-mentioned method 1):
  • Step d-4 The AMF network element indicates the ninth session set and/or the tenth session set to the T-gNB through NGAP signaling (e.g., handover request signaling); wherein the tenth session set is used to indicate the sessions in the aforementioned one or more PDU sessions that need to be denied admission or deactivated/suspended even if the associated slices can be supported by the T-gNB.
  • NGAP signaling e.g., handover request signaling
  • the aforementioned tenth session set can be transparently transmitted from the S-gNB to the T-gNB via the AMF network element.
  • the indication mode of the tenth session set may be direct indication or indirect indication.
  • the specific implementation process may refer to step 3-1, which will not be described in detail here.
  • Step e-4 Even if the T-gNB can support slice #1 associated with PDU Session #1, it will indicate in the NGAP signaling (e.g., handover request acknowledgment signaling) replied to the AMF network element that PDU Session #1 is denied access.
  • the eleventh session set (PDU session resources failed to setup list information element) in the handover request acknowledgment signaling carries the PDU Session ID of PDU Session #1. It should be understood that, with reference to the communication method shown in FIG. 5 or FIG. 7, the eleventh session set can be used to implement the function of the fifth message.
  • Step f-4 The AMF network element may indicate the session to be released to the S-gNB via NGAP signaling (e.g., handover command signaling).
  • NGAP signaling e.g., handover command signaling
  • the twelfth session set PDU session resource to release list cell
  • the PDU Session ID of PDU Session#1 is carried in the twelfth session set. It should be understood that, with reference to the communication method shown in FIG. 5 or FIG. 7 , the twelfth session set can be used to implement the function of the third response message.
  • Opt#5 (another implementation method including steps d to f, refer to the aforementioned method 2):
  • Step d-5 The AMF network element sends the ninth session set and/or the tenth session set to the T-gNB through NGAP signaling (e.g., handover request signaling).
  • NGAP signaling e.g., handover request signaling
  • Step e-5 T-gNB sets PDU Session #1 as admitted in the reply NGAP signaling (e.g., handover request acknowledge signaling), but does not actually prepare RAN side resources for the PDU session.
  • the thirteenth session set e.g., PDU session resources admitted list IE
  • the handover request acknowledge signaling carries the PDU Session ID of PDU Session #1, but does not establish air interface DRB resources for the PDU session. It should be understood that, with reference to the communication method shown in FIG. 5 or FIG. 7, the thirteenth session set can be used to implement the function of the fourth message.
  • Step f-5 The AMF network element may indicate to the S-gNB the session to be released through NGAP signaling (e.g., handover command signaling).
  • NGAP signaling e.g., handover command signaling
  • the PDU Session ID of PDU Session#1 is carried in the fourteenth session set (PDU session resource to release list information element) in the handover command signaling. It should be understood that, with reference to the communication method shown in FIG. 5 or FIG. 7 , the fourteenth session set may be used to implement the function of the third response message.
  • the AMF network element may further determine the admitted session indicated by the T-gNB.
  • the judgment process includes: the AMF determines that the original S-NSSAI corresponding to the PDU Session#1 is the slice #2 that the T-gNB cannot support; Optionally, the AMF network element further determines that the slice #2 is partially allowed NSSAI (or partially rejected NSSAI).
  • the AMF network element can also deactivate the PDU session.
  • Sol#4 The AMF network element deactivates (or suspends) the PDU session. Accordingly, the subsequent session-related signaling (such as handover request signaling) does not include the PDU session.
  • the implementation of Sol#4 can refer to the implementation method in the NG-based handover scenario in Figure 8 above. The specific implementation process of Sol#4 is described as follows.
  • Opt#6 (another implementation method including steps d to f):
  • Step d-6 After the AMF network element determines that the original S-NSSAI corresponding to PDU Session #1 is slice #2 that T-gNB cannot support, the AMF network element can deactivate the PDU session so that the PDU Session ID of PDU Session #1 will not appear in the subsequent process. For example, after step d-6, the fifteenth session set (e.g., PDU session resource setup list cell) in the handover request signaling sent by the AMF network element to the T-gNB will not contain the PDU Session ID of the PDU session.
  • the fifteenth session set e.g., PDU session resource setup list cell
  • the AMF network element may further determine that slice #2 is partially allowed NSSAI (or partially rejected NSSAI).
  • Step e-6 T-gNB performs admission control according to the established PDU session and its associated slices indicated by the AMF network element, and feeds back the sixteenth session set to the AMF network element through NGAP signaling (e.g., handover request acknowledgment signaling).
  • the sixteenth session set is used to indicate the PDU session of successful/failed admission, and the sixteenth session set does not include PDU Session #1. It should be understood that, with reference to the communication method shown in FIG. 8 or FIG. 10, the sixteenth session set can be used to implement the function of the fifth response message.
  • Step f-6 The AMF network element may indicate to the S-gNB through NGAP signaling (e.g., through handover command signaling) that the resources for handover on the T-gNB side are ready.
  • the handover command signaling sent by the AMF network element to the S-gNB carries the seventeenth session set, which is used to indicate the successfully switched PDU sessions and/or the PDU sessions that need to be released, and the seventeenth session set does not include PDU Session#1. It should be understood that, with reference to the communication method shown in FIG8 or FIG10, the seventeenth session set can be used to implement the function of the sixth response message.
  • the present application also provides a communication device, which is used to implement the communication method provided in the above embodiments.
  • the communication device 1300 includes a communication unit 1301 and a processing unit 1302, the communication unit 1301 is used to receive and send data; the processing unit 1302 is used to implement the steps in the communication method shown in Figure 5 or Figure 8.
  • the communication device 1300 can be applied to a terminal device, an access network device or a core network device in the communication system shown in Figure 1, and can implement the communication method provided in the above embodiments and examples of the present application.
  • the functions of each unit in the communication device 1300 are introduced below.
  • the communication device 1300 can be used to implement the actions of the first device in Figure 5, Figure 6 or Figure 7.
  • the communication unit 1301 is used to: receive a switching request from the second device; the switching request is used to request to switch the first session to the first device; the network slice associated with the first session is the first network slice, and the first session is used to provide the terminal device with a service corresponding to the second network slice;
  • the first device is a management device of the first cell, and the list of network slices supported by the first cell includes the identifier of the first network slice, but does not include the identifier of the second network slice;
  • the communication unit 1301 is also used to: receive first information from the second device; the first information is used to indicate that the processing method for the first session is to deny access or deactivate.
  • the processing unit 1302 is used to: deny access to or deactivate the first session based on the first information.
  • the first information includes an identifier of the second network slice.
  • the processing unit 1302 is used to deny access to or deactivate the first session.
  • the first information also includes: an identifier of at least one first-class network slice or an identifier of at least one second-class network slice;
  • the first-class network slice is a network slice that is allowed to be used in a part of the registration area of the terminal device, and the second-class network slice is a network slice that is not allowed to be used in a part of the registration area;
  • the processing unit 1302 is also used to: determine that the identifier of at least one first-class network slice includes the identifier of the second network slice; or, the processing unit 1302 is also used to: determine that the identifier of at least one second-class network slice includes the identifier of the second network slice.
  • the second device when the terminal device moves from the second cell to the first cell, the second device is a management device of the second cell, and the third device is a core network device.
  • the communication unit 1301 is also used to: send a first message to a second device based on the first information; the first message is used to indicate that the first device handles the first session by denying access or deactivating the session; the communication unit 1301 is also used to: send a second message to a third device; the second message is used to indicate that resource establishment of the first session failed.
  • the communication unit 1301 is also used to: send a third message to the second device; the third message is used to indicate that the first device handles the first session as allowing access; the communication unit 1301 is also used to: send a fourth message to the third device based on the first information; the fourth message is used to indicate that resource establishment of the first session failed.
  • the communication unit 1301 is further used to: receive a first response message from a third device; the first response message is used to indicate the release of access resources for the first session.
  • the communication unit 1301 is also used to: send a third message to the second device; the third message is used to indicate that the first device handles the first session as allowing access; the communication unit 1301 is also used to: send an eighth message to the third device; the eighth message is used to indicate that the resources for the first session are successfully established; the communication unit 1301 is also used to: receive a second response message from the third device, and the second response message is used to indicate the release of the access resources for the first session.
  • the second device is a core network device.
  • the communication unit 1301 is further used to: send a fifth message to the second device based on the first information; the fifth message is used to indicate that the first device handles the first session by denying access or deactivating the session.
  • the communication unit 1301 is further used to: send a sixth message to the second device; the sixth message is used to indicate that the first device processes the first session as allowing access.
  • the communication device 1300 can be used to implement the actions of the second device in Figure 5, Figure 6 or Figure 7.
  • the communication unit 1301 is used to: send a handover request to the first device; the handover request is used to request to switch the first session to the first device; the network slice associated with the first session is the first network slice, and the first session is used to provide the terminal device with a service corresponding to the second network slice; the first device is a management device of the first cell, and the list of network slices supported by the first cell includes the identifier of the first network slice; when the network slice list does not include the identifier of the second network slice, the communication unit 1301 is also used to: send first information to the first device; the first information is used to indicate that the processing method for the first session is to deny access or deactivate.
  • the first information also includes an identifier of the second network slice.
  • the first information also includes: an identifier of at least one first-class network slice or an identifier of at least one second-class network slice; the first-class network slice is a network slice that is allowed to be used in part of the registration area of the terminal device, and the second-class network slice is a network slice that is not allowed to be used in part of the registration area.
  • the second device when the terminal device moves from the second cell to the first cell, the second device is a management device of the second cell.
  • the communication unit 1301 is also used to: receive second information from the terminal device; the second information includes an identifier of a second network slice; the second network slice is a network slice that is allowed to be used in a part of the registration area of the terminal device, or the second network slice is a network slice that is not allowed to be used in a part of the registration area.
  • the third device is a core network device, and the communication unit 1301 is further used to: receive third information from the third device; the third information includes an identifier of the second network slice, and the third information also includes an identifier of at least one first-class network slice and/or an identifier of at least one second-class network slice list; the first-class network slice is a network slice allowed to be used in a part of the registration area of the terminal device.
  • the second type of network slice is a network slice that is not allowed to be used in part of the registration area; the processing unit 1302 is used to: determine that the identifier of at least one first type of network slice includes the identifier of the second network slice; or the processing unit 1302 is used to: determine that the identifier of at least one second type of network slice includes the identifier of the second network slice.
  • the communication unit 1301 is further used to: receive a first message from the first device; the first message is used to indicate that the first device handles the first session by denying access or deactivating the session.
  • the communication unit 1301 is further used to: receive a third message from the first device; the third message is used to indicate that the first device handles the first session as allowing access.
  • the second device is a core network device.
  • the processing unit 1302 is used to: determine that the second network slice is a network slice that is allowed to be used in a partial area of the registration area of the terminal device; or, the processing unit 1302 is used to: determine that the second network slice is a network slice that is not allowed to be used in a partial area of the registration area.
  • the communication unit 1301 is further used to: receive a fifth message from the first device; the fifth message is used to indicate that the first device handles the first session by denying access or deactivating the session.
  • the communication unit 1301 is further used to: receive a sixth message from the first device; the sixth message is used to indicate that the first device processes the first session as allowing access.
  • the fourth device when the terminal device moves from the third cell to the first cell, the fourth device is the management device of the third cell, and the communication unit 1301 is also used to: receive a switching request from the fourth device; the communication unit 1301 is also used to: send a third response message to the fourth device; the third response message is used to indicate the release of the access resources of the first session.
  • the fourth device is a management device of the third cell, and the communication unit 1301 is further used to: receive first information from the fourth device.
  • the communication device 1300 can be used to implement the actions of the third device in Figure 5 or Figure 6.
  • the communication unit 1301 is used to: receive an eighth message from the first device; the eighth message is used to indicate that the resources of the first session are successfully established; the network slice associated with the first session is the first network slice, and the first session is used to provide the terminal device with a service corresponding to the second network slice; the first device is a management device of the first cell, and the list of network slices supported by the first cell includes the identifier of the first network slice; when the network slice list does not include the identifier of the second network slice, the communication unit 1301 is also used to: send a second response message to the first device; the second response message is used to indicate the release of the access resources of the first session; the third device is a core network device.
  • the processing unit 1302 is used to: determine that the second network slice is a network slice that is allowed to be used in a partial area of the registration area of the terminal device; or, the processing unit 1302 is also used to: determine that the second network slice is a network slice that is not allowed to be used in a partial area of the registration area.
  • the communication device 1300 can be used to implement the actions of the fifth device in Figure 8, Figure 9 or Figure 10.
  • the communication unit 1301 is used to: receive a switching request, the switching request is used to request to switch the second session to the sixth device; the network slice associated with the second session is the first network slice, and the second session is used to provide the terminal device with a service corresponding to the second network slice; the fifth device is a core network device; the sixth device is a management device of the first cell, and the list of network slices supported by the first cell includes the identifier of the first network slice; when the network slice list does not include the identifier of the second network slice, the processing unit 1302 is used to: deactivate the second session.
  • the processing unit 1302 is also used to: determine that the second network slice is a network slice that is allowed to be used in a partial area of the registration area of the terminal device; or, the processing unit 1302 is also used to: determine that the second network slice is a network slice that is not allowed to be used in a partial area of the registration area.
  • the communication unit 1301 is also used to: receive a seventh message from a sixth device; the seventh message is used to indicate that the sixth device's preprocessing method for the second session is to allow access; when the network slice list does not include the identifier of the second network slice, the processing unit 1302 is also used to: deactivate the second session in response to the seventh message.
  • the communication unit 1301 is further used to: after receiving a switching request from a sixth device, send fourth information to the sixth device; the fourth information is used to indicate the release of access resources for the second session.
  • the communication unit 1301 when the switching request is used to request switching the second session from the seventh device to the sixth device, the communication unit 1301 is also used to: receive a switching request from the seventh device, and the communication unit 1301 is also used to: send fifth information to the seventh device, and the fifth information is used to indicate the release of resources allocated by the aforementioned seventh device for the second session.
  • the embodiment of the present application also provides another communication device, the communication device 1400 can implement the communication method provided in the above embodiment, and has the functions of the communication device 1300 provided in the above embodiment.
  • the communication device 1400 includes: a memory 1402 and a processor 1401.
  • the communication device 1400 also includes a communication interface 1403.
  • the communication interface 1403, the processor 1401 and the memory 1402 are connected to each other.
  • the communication interface 1403, the processor 1401 and the memory 1402 are interconnected via a bus 1404.
  • the bus 1404 may be a peripheral component interconnect (PCI) bus or an extended industry standard architecture (EISA) bus.
  • PCI peripheral component interconnect
  • EISA extended industry standard architecture
  • the bus may be divided into an address bus, a data bus, a control bus, etc.
  • FIG14 is represented by only one thick line, but it does not mean that there is only one bus or one type of bus.
  • the communication interface 1403 is used to receive and send signals to achieve communication with other devices other than the communication device.
  • the processor 1401 can be a central processing unit (CPU), a network processor (NP) or a combination of CPU and NP, etc.
  • the processor 1401 can further include a hardware chip.
  • the above-mentioned hardware chip can be an application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a programmable logic device (PLD) or a combination thereof.
  • the above-mentioned PLD can be a complex programmable logic device (CPLD), a field-programmable gate array (FPGA), a generic array logic (GAL) or any combination thereof.
  • CPLD complex programmable logic device
  • FPGA field-programmable gate array
  • GAL generic array logic
  • the memory 1402 is used to store program instructions, etc.
  • the program instructions may include program codes, which include computer operation instructions.
  • the memory 1402 may include random access memory (RAM), and may also include non-volatile memory (non-volatile memory), such as at least one disk storage.
  • the processor 1401 executes the program instructions stored in the memory 1402 to implement the above functions, thereby implementing the method provided in the above embodiment.
  • the memory 1402 may include the first device, the second device, the third device, the fourth device, the fifth device, the sixth device or the seventh device shown in the embodiment of the present application.
  • an embodiment of the present application further provides a computer program, which, when executed on a computer, enables the computer to execute the method provided in the above embodiment.
  • an embodiment of the present application further provides a computer-readable storage medium, in which a computer program is stored.
  • the computer program runs on a computer, the computer executes the method provided in the above embodiment.
  • the storage medium may be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer.
  • a computer-readable medium may include RAM, ROM, EEPROM, CD-ROM or other optical disk storage, magnetic disk storage medium or other magnetic storage device, or any other medium that can be used to carry or store the desired program code in the form of instructions or data structures and can be accessed by a computer.
  • an embodiment of the present application further provides a chip, which is used to read a computer program stored in a memory to implement the method provided in the above embodiment.
  • the embodiments of the present application may be provided as methods, systems, or computer program products. Therefore, the present application may adopt the form of a complete hardware embodiment, a complete software embodiment, or an embodiment in combination with software and hardware. Moreover, the present application may adopt the form of a computer program product implemented in one or more computer-usable storage media (including but not limited to disk storage, CD-ROM, optical storage, etc.) that include computer-usable program code.
  • a computer-usable storage media including but not limited to disk storage, CD-ROM, optical storage, etc.
  • These computer program instructions may also be stored in a computer-readable memory that can direct a computer or other programmable data processing device to work in a specific manner, so that the instructions stored in the computer-readable memory produce a manufactured product including an instruction device that implements the functions specified in one or more processes in the flowchart and/or one or more boxes in the block diagram.
  • These computer program instructions may also be loaded onto a computer or other programmable data processing device so that a series of operational steps are executed on the computer or other programmable device to produce a computer-implemented process, whereby the instructions executed on the computer or other programmable device provide steps for implementing the functions specified in one or more processes in the flowchart and/or one or more boxes in the block diagram.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Computer Security & Cryptography (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

Provided in the embodiments of the present application are a communication method and apparatus. The method comprises: a first device receiving a switching request from a second device, wherein the switching request is used for requesting the switching of a first session to the first device, a network slice associated with the first session is a first network slice, and the first session is used for providing to a terminal device a service corresponding to a second network slice; and when a network slice list supported by a cell managed by the first device does not comprise an identifier of the second network slice, the second device sending first information to the first device, wherein the first information is used for indicating that a processing mode for the first session is rejected access or deactivation. By using the method, when a network slice associated with a first session is different from a network slice that actually provides a service to the first session, the first device can perform access control on the basis of the network slice that actually provides the service, thereby improving the accuracy of session switching, and improving the communication efficiency.

Description

一种通信方法及装置A communication method and device

相关申请的交叉引用CROSS-REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS

本申请要求在2023年09月27日提交中华人民共和国国家知识产权局、申请号为202311282891.X、申请名称为“一种通信方法及装置”的中国专利申请的优先权,其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。This application claims the priority of the Chinese patent application filed with the State Intellectual Property Office of the People's Republic of China on September 27, 2023, with application number 202311282891.X and application name "A Communication Method and Device", all contents of which are incorporated by reference in this application.

技术领域Technical Field

本申请涉及通信技术领域,尤其涉及一种通信方法及装置。The present application relates to the field of communication technology, and in particular to a communication method and device.

背景技术Background Art

为了使得通信网络在具备灵活、可拓展性等特性的同时,能够满足不同的业务需求,第五代(5th generation,5G)移动通信系统提出了通过端到端的网络切片(network slicing,下面简称为切片)为用户提供定制化的网络服务。切片可以看做是一个逻辑子网,各个切片之间相互隔离,从而可有针对性的为用户提供服务。网络切片选择辅助信息(network slice selection assistance information,NSSAI)用于指示一个或多个单网络切片选择辅助信息(Single NSSAI,S-NSSAI)(或者S-NSSAI列表),S-NSSAI用于标识和区分不同逻辑子网。In order to make the communication network flexible and scalable while meeting different business needs, the fifth generation (5G) mobile communication system proposes to provide users with customized network services through end-to-end network slicing (hereinafter referred to as slicing). A slice can be regarded as a logical subnet, and each slice is isolated from each other, so that targeted services can be provided to users. Network slice selection assistance information (NSSAI) is used to indicate one or more single network slice selection assistance information (Single NSSAI, S-NSSAI) (or S-NSSAI list), and S-NSSAI is used to identify and distinguish different logical subnets.

终端设备的注册区域(registration area,RA)内包括一个或多个跟踪区域(tracking area,TA),每个TA能够为终端设备提供不同切片对应的服务。TA是运营商针对小区级的配置,多个小区可以配置相同的TA,且一个小区只能属于一个TA。终端设备的RA支持的切片可以通过以下至少一项来表示:允许NSSAI(Allowed NSSAI)、部分允许NSSAI(Partially Allowed NSSAI),和/或,部分拒绝NSSAI(Partially Rejected NSSAI)。假设终端设备当前所在的小区支持的切片服务包括切片1和切片2对应的服务,切片1在终端设备的RA内属于允许NSSAI,当切片2的资源在核心网侧发生拥塞或者不可用时,为了保证终端设备的业务的连续性,可能会建立与切片1(即替代S-NSSAI(Alternative S-NSSAI))相关联的会话,并通过该会话来提供切片2(即原始S-NSSAI(original S-NSSAI))对应的服务,即会话的原始S-NSSAI与替换S-NSSAI不一致。The registration area (RA) of a terminal device includes one or more tracking areas (TA), each of which can provide services corresponding to different slices for the terminal device. TA is the operator's configuration at the cell level. Multiple cells can be configured with the same TA, and a cell can only belong to one TA. The slices supported by the RA of the terminal device can be represented by at least one of the following: Allowed NSSAI, Partially Allowed NSSAI, and/or Partially Rejected NSSAI. Assume that the slice services supported by the cell where the terminal device is currently located include services corresponding to slice 1 and slice 2, and slice 1 belongs to the allowed NSSAI in the RA of the terminal device. When the resources of slice 2 are congested or unavailable on the core network side, in order to ensure the continuity of the terminal device's services, a session associated with slice 1 (i.e., alternative S-NSSAI) may be established, and the service corresponding to slice 2 (i.e., original S-NSSAI) may be provided through the session, that is, the original S-NSSAI of the session is inconsistent with the alternative S-NSSAI.

当终端设备从源小区(即当前小区)移动到目标小区时,终端设备的会话需要从源小区的管理设备迁移到目标小区的管理设备,当目标小区能够提供替换S-NSSAI对应的服务且无法提供原始S-NSSAI对应的服务时,目标小区如何对会话进行会话迁移处理需要进一步研究。When a terminal device moves from a source cell (i.e., the current cell) to a target cell, the session of the terminal device needs to be migrated from the management device of the source cell to the management device of the target cell. When the target cell can provide the service corresponding to the replacement S-NSSAI and cannot provide the service corresponding to the original S-NSSAI, how the target cell performs session migration processing on the session needs further study.

发明内容Summary of the invention

本申请实施例提供一种通信方法及装置,用于在会话的原始S-NSSAI与替换S-NSSAI不一致的情况下,提高会话切换的准确性,提高通信效率。The embodiments of the present application provide a communication method and apparatus for improving the accuracy of session switching and improving communication efficiency when the original S-NSSAI and the replacement S-NSSAI of the session are inconsistent.

第一方面,本申请实施例提供一种通信方法,该方法包括:第一设备接收来自第二设备的切换请求;切换请求用于请求将第一会话切换至第一设备;第一会话关联的网络切片为第一网络切片,且第一会话用于为终端设备提供第二网络切片对应的服务;第一设备为第一小区的管理设备,第一小区支持的网络切片列表包括第一网络切片的标识,且不包括第二网络切片的标识;第一设备接收来自第二设备的第一信息;第一信息用于指示对第一会话的处理方式为拒绝准入或者去激活。In a first aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a communication method, the method comprising: a first device receives a switching request from a second device; the switching request is used to request to switch a first session to the first device; the network slice associated with the first session is the first network slice, and the first session is used to provide a terminal device with a service corresponding to the second network slice; the first device is a management device of a first cell, and the list of network slices supported by the first cell includes an identifier of the first network slice, but does not include an identifier of the second network slice; the first device receives first information from the second device; the first information is used to indicate that the processing method for the first session is to deny access or deactivate.

采用该方法,第一设备在接收到切换请求的情况下,还接收来自第二设备的第一信息;当第一设备对应的第一小区支持的网络切片列表不包括第一会话实际服务的网络切片(第二网络切片,即原始S-NSSAI)时,第一信息指示对第一会话的处理方式为拒绝准入或者去激活;从而使得第一设备可以根据第一信息对第一会话进行处理;也就是说,在发生会话的网络切片替换(即第一网络切片与第二网络切片不同)后,在针对该会话的切换过程中,第一设备(即目标基站)能够基于该会话原始关联的切片(即第二网络切片)进行准入控制,从而能够提高会话切换的准确性,提高通信效率。Using this method, when the first device receives a switching request, it also receives first information from the second device; when the network slice list supported by the first cell corresponding to the first device does not include the network slice actually served by the first session (the second network slice, i.e., the original S-NSSAI), the first information indicates that the processing method for the first session is to deny access or deactivate; thereby, the first device can process the first session according to the first information; that is, after the network slice replacement of the session occurs (i.e., the first network slice is different from the second network slice), during the switching process for the session, the first device (i.e., the target base station) can perform access control based on the slice originally associated with the session (i.e., the second network slice), thereby improving the accuracy of session switching and improving communication efficiency.

在一种可能的设计中,第一设备还可以根据第一信息,对第一会话进行拒绝准入或者去激活的操作。In a possible design, the first device may also deny access to or deactivate the first session based on the first information.

采用这样的设计,即使第一小区能够支持第一会话关联的网络切片(第一网络切片,即替换S-NSSAI)对应的服务,第一设备也可以根据第一信息对第一会话的切换请求进行拒绝准入或者去激活的操作,这样,第一信息直接指示第一会话的处理方式,从而可以提高会话切换的准确性,提高通信效率。 With such a design, even if the first cell can support the service corresponding to the network slice associated with the first session (the first network slice, i.e., replacing S-NSSAI), the first device can also deny access or deactivate the switching request of the first session based on the first information. In this way, the first information directly indicates the processing method of the first session, thereby improving the accuracy of session switching and improving communication efficiency.

在一种可能的设计中,第一信息包括第二网络切片的标识,当网络切片列表不包括第二网络切片的标识时,第一设备还可以对第一会话进行拒绝准入或者去激活的操作。In one possible design, the first information includes an identifier of the second network slice. When the network slice list does not include the identifier of the second network slice, the first device can also deny access to or deactivate the first session.

采用这样的设计,即使第一小区能够支持第一会话关联的网络切片(第一网络切片,即替换S-NSSAI),第一设备还可以根据第一信息中包括的第二网络切片的标识,自行判断对第一会话的处理方式,这样,第一信息可以间接指示第一会话的处理方式,从而可以提高会话切换的准确性,提高通信效率。With such a design, even if the first cell can support the network slice associated with the first session (the first network slice, i.e., replacing S-NSSAI), the first device can also determine how to handle the first session by itself based on the identifier of the second network slice included in the first information. In this way, the first information can indirectly indicate the processing method of the first session, thereby improving the accuracy of session switching and improving communication efficiency.

在一种可能的设计中,第一信息还包括:至少一个第一类网络切片的标识或者至少一个第二类网络切片的标识;第一类网络切片为允许在终端设备的注册区域中部分区域内使用的网络切片,第二类网络切片为不允许在注册区域中部分区域内使用的网络切片;第一设备还可以确定至少一个第一类网络切片的标识包括第二网络切片的标识;或者,第一设备还可以确定至少一个第二类网络切片的标识包括第二网络切片的标识。In a possible design, the first information also includes: an identifier of at least one first-class network slice or an identifier of at least one second-class network slice; the first-class network slice is a network slice that is allowed to be used in a part of the registration area of the terminal device, and the second-class network slice is a network slice that is not allowed to be used in a part of the registration area; the first device can also determine that the identifier of at least one first-class network slice includes the identifier of the second network slice; or, the first device can also determine that the identifier of at least one second-class network slice includes the identifier of the second network slice.

采用这样的设计,第一设备还可以确定第一会话实际服务的网络切片是否属于终端设备的注册区域中部分区域内允许使用的网络切片(或者注册区域中部分区域内拒绝使用的网络切片),这样,在第一信息间接指示第一会话的处理方式时,第一设备可以进一步确定该处理方式,从而可以提高会话切换的准确性,提高通信效率。With such a design, the first device can also determine whether the network slice actually served by the first session belongs to a network slice allowed for use in a part of the registration area of the terminal device (or a network slice denied for use in a part of the registration area). In this way, when the first information indirectly indicates the processing method of the first session, the first device can further determine the processing method, thereby improving the accuracy of session switching and improving communication efficiency.

在一种可能的设计中,当终端设备从第二小区移动至第一小区时,第二设备为第二小区的管理设备,第三设备为核心网设备。In one possible design, when the terminal device moves from the second cell to the first cell, the second device is a management device of the second cell, and the third device is a core network device.

采用这样的设计,第二设备(第二小区的管理设备,或者源基站)可以通过第一信息指示第一设备(第一小区的管理设备,或称目标基站)对第一会话的处理方式;例如,在基于Xn的切换场景下,源基站可以对目标基站进行会话的处理方式的指示。With such a design, the second device (the management device of the second cell, or the source base station) can instruct the first device (the management device of the first cell, or the target base station) on how to handle the first session through the first information; for example, in an Xn-based switching scenario, the source base station can instruct the target base station on how to handle the session.

在一种可能的设计中,第一设备还可以根据第一信息,向第二设备发送第一消息;第一消息用于指示第一设备对第一会话的处理方式为拒绝准入或者去激活;第一设备还可以向第三设备发送第二消息;第二消息用于指示第一会话的资源建立失败。In one possible design, the first device may also send a first message to the second device based on the first information; the first message is used to indicate that the first device handles the first session by denying access or deactivating the session; the first device may also send a second message to the third device; the second message is used to indicate that resource establishment of the first session failed.

采用这样的设计,第一设备可以根据第一信息,向第二设备指示对第一会话的处理方式为拒绝准入或者去激活,并且,在处理方式为拒绝准入或者去激活的前提下,第一设备可以不建立第一会话的资源,并向第三设备指示第一会话的资源建立失败,从而使得第一会话的处理方式在第一设备、第二设备和第三设备之间达成共识,提高通信效率。With such a design, the first device can indicate to the second device, based on the first information, that the processing method for the first session is to deny access or deactivate. Moreover, under the premise that the processing method is to deny access or deactivate, the first device may not establish resources for the first session, and indicate to the third device that the resource establishment of the first session has failed, thereby allowing the first device, the second device, and the third device to reach a consensus on the processing method for the first session, thereby improving communication efficiency.

在一种可能的设计中,第一设备还可以向第二设备发送第三消息;第三消息用于指示第一设备对第一会话的处理方式为允许准入;第一设备还可以根据第一信息,向第三设备发送第四消息;第四消息用于指示第一会话的资源建立失败。In one possible design, the first device may also send a third message to the second device; the third message is used to indicate that the first device handles the first session as allowing access; the first device may also send a fourth message to the third device based on the first information; the fourth message is used to indicate that resource establishment of the first session failed.

采用这样的设计,即使第一设备向第二设备指示对第一会话的处理方式为允许准入,第一设备也可以根据第一信息,选择不建立第一会话的资源,从而中断第一会话的切换流程,并且,第一设备向第三设备指示第一会话的资源建立失败,从而保证不执行第一会话的切换请求对应的请求,提高会话切换的准确性,提高通信效率。With such a design, even if the first device indicates to the second device that the processing method for the first session is to allow access, the first device can also choose not to establish resources for the first session based on the first information, thereby interrupting the switching process of the first session, and the first device indicates to the third device that the resource establishment of the first session has failed, thereby ensuring that the request corresponding to the switching request of the first session is not executed, thereby improving the accuracy of session switching and improving communication efficiency.

在一种可能的设计中,第一设备还可以接收来自第三设备的第一响应消息;第一响应消息用于指示释放第一会话的准入资源。In a possible design, the first device may also receive a first response message from the third device; the first response message is used to indicate the release of admission resources for the first session.

采用这样的设计,第一设备可以接收来自第三设备的响应消息,从而第一设备可以释放已经建立的第一会话的准入资源,减少资源浪费。With such a design, the first device can receive a response message from the third device, so that the first device can release the access resources of the established first session, thereby reducing resource waste.

在一种可能的设计中,第一设备还可以向第二设备发送第三消息;第三消息用于指示第一设备对第一会话的处理方式为允许准入;第一设备还可以向第三设备发送第八消息;第八消息用于指示第一会话的资源建立成功;第一设备还可以接收来自第三设备的第二响应消息,第二响应消息用于指示释放第一会话的准入资源。In one possible design, the first device may also send a third message to the second device; the third message is used to indicate that the first device handles the first session as allowing access; the first device may also send an eighth message to the third device; the eighth message is used to indicate that the resources for the first session are successfully established; the first device may also receive a second response message from the third device, and the second response message is used to indicate the release of the access resources for the first session.

采用这样的设计,即使第一设备对第一会话的处理方式设置为允许准入,并建立第一会话的准入资源,第一设备也可能会接收到来自第三设备的用于释放第一会话的准入资源的指示。也就是说,在基于Xn的切换场景下,核心网设备也可以对目标基站进行会话的处理方式的指示,从而中断第一会话的切换流程,这样,能够提高会话切换的准确性,提高通信效率。其中,核心网指示目标基站对第一会话的处理方式的具体实现方法可以参考本申请实施例后续第四方面的论述,此处不进行赘述。With such a design, even if the first device sets the processing mode of the first session to allow access and establishes access resources for the first session, the first device may receive an instruction from the third device to release the access resources for the first session. That is to say, in the Xn-based switching scenario, the core network device can also instruct the target base station on the processing mode of the session, thereby interrupting the switching process of the first session, which can improve the accuracy of the session switching and improve the communication efficiency. Among them, the specific implementation method of the core network instructing the target base station to process the first session can refer to the discussion of the fourth aspect of the subsequent embodiments of this application, which will not be repeated here.

在一种可能的设计中,第二设备为核心网设备。 In one possible design, the second device is a core network device.

采用这样的设计,第二设备(核心网设备)可以通过第一信息指示第一设备(第一小区的管理设备,或称目标基站)对第一会话的处理方式;例如,在基于NG的切换场景下,核心网设备可以对目标基站进行会话的处理方式的指示。With such a design, the second device (core network device) can instruct the first device (the management device of the first cell, or the target base station) on how to handle the first session through the first information; for example, in an NG-based switching scenario, the core network device can instruct the target base station on how to handle the session.

在一种可能的设计中,第一设备还可以根据第一信息,向第二设备发送第五消息;第五消息用于指示第一设备对第一会话的处理方式为拒绝准入或者去激活。In a possible design, the first device may also send a fifth message to the second device based on the first information; the fifth message is used to indicate that the first device handles the first session by denying access or deactivating the session.

在一种可能的设计中,第一设备还可以向第二设备发送第六消息;第六消息用于指示第一设备对第一会话的处理方式为允许准入。In a possible design, the first device may also send a sixth message to the second device; the sixth message is used to indicate that the first device handles the first session as allowing access.

第二方面,本申请实施例提供一种通信方法,该方法包括:第二设备向第一设备发送的切换请求;切换请求用于请求将第一会话切换至第一设备;第一会话关联的网络切片为第一网络切片,且第一会话用于为终端设备提供第二网络切片对应的服务;第一设备为第一小区的管理设备,第一小区支持的网络切片列表包括第一网络切片的标识;当网络切片列表不包括第二网络切片的标识时,第二设备向第一设备发送第一信息;第一信息用于指示对第一会话的处理方式为拒绝准入或者去激活。In a second aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a communication method, the method comprising: a switching request sent by a second device to a first device; the switching request is used to request to switch a first session to the first device; the network slice associated with the first session is the first network slice, and the first session is used to provide the terminal device with a service corresponding to the second network slice; the first device is a management device of a first cell, and the list of network slices supported by the first cell includes an identifier of the first network slice; when the network slice list does not include the identifier of the second network slice, the second device sends first information to the first device; the first information is used to indicate that the processing method for the first session is to deny access or deactivate.

采用该方法,当第一设备对应的第一小区支持的网络切片列表不包括第一会话实际服务的网络切片(第二网络切片,即原始S-NSSAI)时,第二设备可以通过第一信息指示对第一会话的处理方式为拒绝准入或者去激活,以使第一设备可以正确的处理第一会话的切换请求,提高通信效率。Using this method, when the list of network slices supported by the first cell corresponding to the first device does not include the network slice actually served by the first session (the second network slice, i.e., the original S-NSSAI), the second device can indicate through the first information that the processing method for the first session is to deny access or deactivate, so that the first device can correctly handle the switching request of the first session and improve communication efficiency.

在一种可能的设计中,第一信息还包括第二网络切片的标识。In one possible design, the first information also includes an identifier of the second network slice.

采用这样的设计,第一信息中包括第一会话实际服务的网络切片(第二网络切片,即原始S-NSSAI),从而第一设备可以自行判断第一小区是否能够支持该替换S-NSSAI对应的服务,从而对第一会话的切换请求进行处理,也就是说,第一信息间接指示第一会话的处理方式,从而可以提高会话切换的准确性,提高通信效率。With such a design, the first information includes the network slice actually served by the first session (the second network slice, i.e., the original S-NSSAI), so that the first device can determine by itself whether the first cell can support the service corresponding to the replacement S-NSSAI, thereby processing the switching request of the first session. In other words, the first information indirectly indicates the processing method of the first session, thereby improving the accuracy of session switching and improving communication efficiency.

在一种可能的设计中,第一信息还包括:至少一个第一类网络切片的标识或者至少一个第二类网络切片的标识;第一类网络切片为允许在终端设备的注册区域中部分区域内使用的网络切片,第二类网络切片为不允许在注册区域中部分区域内使用的网络切片。In a possible design, the first information also includes: an identifier of at least one first-class network slice or an identifier of at least one second-class network slice; the first-class network slice is a network slice that is allowed to be used in part of the registration area of the terminal device, and the second-class network slice is a network slice that is not allowed to be used in part of the registration area.

采用这样的设计,第一信息还包括注册区域中部分区域内允许使用的网络切片(或者注册区域中部分区域内拒绝使用的网络切片),也就是说,在第一信息间接指示第一会话的处理方式时,第一设备可以进一步确定该处理方式,从而可以提高会话切换的准确性,提高通信效率。With such a design, the first information also includes network slices allowed for use in some areas of the registration area (or network slices denied for use in some areas of the registration area). That is, when the first information indirectly indicates the processing method of the first session, the first device can further determine the processing method, thereby improving the accuracy of session switching and improving communication efficiency.

在一种可能的设计中,当终端设备从第二小区移动至第一小区时,第二设备为第二小区的管理设备。In a possible design, when the terminal device moves from the second cell to the first cell, the second device is a management device of the second cell.

采用这样的设计,第二设备(即第二小区的管理设备,或者源基站)可以通过第一信息指示第一设备(第一小区的管理设备,或称目标基站)对第一会话的处理方式;例如,在基于Xn的切换场景下,源基站可以对目标基站进行会话的处理方式的指示。With such a design, the second device (i.e., the management device of the second cell, or the source base station) can instruct the first device (the management device of the first cell, or the target base station) on how to handle the first session through the first information; for example, in an Xn-based switching scenario, the source base station can instruct the target base station on how to handle the session.

在一种可能的设计中,第二设备还可以接收来自终端设备的第二信息;第二信息包括第二网络切片的标识;第二网络切片为允许在终端设备的注册区域中部分区域内使用的网络切片,或者,第二网络切片为不允许在注册区域中部分区域内使用的网络切片。In a possible design, the second device can also receive second information from the terminal device; the second information includes an identifier of a second network slice; the second network slice is a network slice that is allowed to be used in a part of the registration area of the terminal device, or the second network slice is a network slice that is not allowed to be used in a part of the registration area.

采用这样的设计,终端设备可以确定第一会话对应的原始S-NSSAI(即第二网络切片),还可以确定该原始S-NSSAI为允许(或不允许)在终端设备的注册区域中部分区域内使用的网络切片;相应的,第二设备可以通过终端设备获取第二网络切片,从而确定对第一会话的切换请求的处理方式。With such a design, the terminal device can determine the original S-NSSAI (i.e., the second network slice) corresponding to the first session, and can also determine that the original S-NSSAI is a network slice that is allowed (or not allowed) to be used in a part of the registration area of the terminal device; accordingly, the second device can obtain the second network slice through the terminal device, thereby determining how to handle the switching request for the first session.

在一种可能的设计中,第三设备为核心网设备,第二设备还可以接收来自第三设备的第三信息;第三信息包括第二网络切片的标识,第三信息还包括至少一个第一类网络切片的标识和/或至少一个第二类网络切片列表的标识;第一类网络切片为允许在终端设备的注册区域中部分区域内使用的网络切片,第二类网络切片为不允许在注册区域中部分区域内使用的网络切片;第二设备还可以确定至少一个第一类网络切片的标识包括第二网络切片的标识;或者,第二设备确定至少一个第二类网络切片的标识包括第二网络切片的标识。In a possible design, the third device is a core network device, and the second device can also receive third information from the third device; the third information includes an identifier of the second network slice, and the third information also includes an identifier of at least one first-class network slice and/or an identifier of at least one second-class network slice list; the first-class network slice is a network slice that is allowed to be used in part of the registration area of the terminal device, and the second-class network slice is a network slice that is not allowed to be used in part of the registration area; the second device can also determine that the identifier of at least one first-class network slice includes the identifier of the second network slice; or, the second device determines that the identifier of at least one second-class network slice includes the identifier of the second network slice.

采用这样的设计,核心网设备可以通过第三信息将“第一会话对应的原始S-NSSAI(即第二网络切片)”以及“终端设备相关的允许(或不允许)在终端设备的注册区域中部分区域内使用的网络切片列表”发送给第二设备;相应的,第二设备可以获取该第三信息,从而确定对第一会话的切换请求的处理方式。With such a design, the core network device can send "the original S-NSSAI (i.e., the second network slice) corresponding to the first session" and "the list of network slices related to the terminal device that are allowed (or not allowed) to be used in part of the registration area of the terminal device" to the second device through the third information; accordingly, the second device can obtain the third information to determine how to handle the switching request for the first session.

在一种可能的设计中,第二设备还可以接收来自第一设备的第一消息;第一消息用于指示第一设备对第一会话的处理方式为拒绝准入或者去激活。 In a possible design, the second device may also receive a first message from the first device; the first message is used to indicate that the first device handles the first session by denying admission or deactivating the session.

采用这样的设计,第二设备可以接收第一消息,即接收第一设备对第一会话的处理方式,从而使得第一会话的处理方式在第一设备和第二设备之间达成共识,提高通信效率。With such a design, the second device can receive the first message, that is, receive the processing method of the first session by the first device, so that the processing method of the first session can be agreed upon between the first device and the second device, thereby improving communication efficiency.

在一种可能的设计中,第二设备还可以接收来自第一设备的第三消息;第三消息用于指示第一设备对第一会话的处理方式为允许准入。In a possible design, the second device may also receive a third message from the first device; the third message is used to indicate that the first device handles the first session as allowing access.

采用这样的设计,第二设备可以接收第三消息,即接收第一设备对第一会话的处理方式为允许准入,从而使得第一会话的处理方式在第一设备和第二设备之间达成共识,第二设备可以根据该第三消息执行下一步操作,例如继续执行第一会话的切换流程(避免漏处理),从而提高会话切换的准确性,提高通信效率。With such a design, the second device can receive the third message, that is, receive the first device's processing method for the first session as allowing access, so that a consensus is reached between the first device and the second device on the processing method of the first session. The second device can perform the next step according to the third message, such as continuing the switching process of the first session (avoiding missing processing), thereby improving the accuracy of session switching and improving communication efficiency.

在一种可能的设计中,第二设备为核心网设备。In one possible design, the second device is a core network device.

采用这样的设计,核心网设备可以通过第一信息指示第一设备(第一小区的管理设备,或者目标基站)对第一会话的处理方式;例如,在基于NG的切换场景下,核心网设备可以对目标基站进行会话的处理方式的指示。With such a design, the core network device can instruct the first device (the management device of the first cell, or the target base station) on how to handle the first session through the first information; for example, in an NG-based switching scenario, the core network device can instruct the target base station on how to handle the session.

在一种可能的设计中,第二设备还可以确定第二网络切片为允许在终端设备的注册区域中部分区域内使用的网络切片;或者,第二设备确定第二网络切片为不允许在注册区域中部分区域内使用的网络切片。In one possible design, the second device may also determine that the second network slice is a network slice that is allowed to be used in a partial area of the registration area of the terminal device; or, the second device determines that the second network slice is a network slice that is not allowed to be used in a partial area of the registration area.

采用这样的设计,第二设备可以确定第一会话实际服务的网络切片是否属于终端设备的注册区域中部分区域内允许使用的网络切片(或者注册区域中部分区域内拒绝使用的网络切片),从而进一步确定第一会话的处理方式,提高会话切换的准确性,提高通信效率。With such a design, the second device can determine whether the network slice actually served by the first session belongs to a network slice allowed for use in part of the registration area of the terminal device (or a network slice denied for use in part of the registration area), thereby further determining the processing method for the first session, improving the accuracy of session switching, and improving communication efficiency.

在一种可能的设计中,第二设备还可以接收来自第一设备的第五消息;第五消息用于指示第一设备对第一会话的处理方式为拒绝准入或者去激活。In a possible design, the second device may also receive a fifth message from the first device; the fifth message is used to indicate that the first device handles the first session by denying admission or deactivating the session.

采用这样的设计,第二设备可以接收第五消息,即接收第一设备对第一会话的处理方式(拒绝准入或者去激活),从而使得第一会话的处理方式在第一设备和第二设备之间达成共识,提高通信效率。With this design, the second device can receive the fifth message, that is, receive the first device's processing method for the first session (denying access or deactivating), so that the processing method for the first session can reach a consensus between the first device and the second device, thereby improving communication efficiency.

在一种可能的设计中,第二设备还可以接收来自第一设备的第六消息;第六消息用于指示第一设备对第一会话的处理方式为允许准入。In a possible design, the second device may also receive a sixth message from the first device; the sixth message is used to indicate that the first device handles the first session as allowing access.

采用这样的设计,第二设备可以接收第六消息,即接收第一设备对第一会话的处理方式(允许准入),从而使得第一会话的处理方式在第一设备和第二设备之间达成共识,第二设备可以根据该第六消息执行下一步操作,例如继续执行第一会话的切换流程(避免漏处理),从而提高会话切换的准确性,提高通信效率。With such a design, the second device can receive the sixth message, that is, receive the first device's processing method for the first session (allowing access), so that the processing method for the first session can reach a consensus between the first device and the second device, and the second device can perform the next step according to the sixth message, such as continuing the switching process of the first session (avoiding missing processing), thereby improving the accuracy of session switching and improving communication efficiency.

在一种可能的设计中,当终端设备从第三小区移动至第一小区时,第四设备为第三小区的管理设备,第二设备还可以接收来自第四设备的切换请求;第二设备还可以向第四设备发送第三响应消息;第三响应消息用于指示释放第一会话的准入资源。其中,在第四设备(基站侧)中第一会话的准入资源可以是基站已经为第一会话分配好的资源。In a possible design, when the terminal device moves from the third cell to the first cell, the fourth device is the management device of the third cell, and the second device can also receive a handover request from the fourth device; the second device can also send a third response message to the fourth device; the third response message is used to indicate the release of the admission resources of the first session. The admission resources of the first session in the fourth device (base station side) can be the resources that the base station has allocated for the first session.

采用这样的设计,第二设备(核心网设备)可以接收来自第四设备(第三小区的管理设备,或者源基站)的切换请求,并指示第四设备释放第一会话的准入资源,减少资源浪费,还能够使得第一会话的处理方式在核心网设备和源基站之间达成共识,提高会话切换的准确性,提高通信效率。With such a design, the second device (core network device) can receive a switching request from the fourth device (the management device of the third cell, or the source base station) and instruct the fourth device to release the access resources of the first session, thereby reducing resource waste. It can also enable the core network device and the source base station to reach a consensus on the processing method of the first session, thereby improving the accuracy of session switching and improving communication efficiency.

在一种可能的设计中,当终端设备从第三小区移动至第一小区时,第四设备为第三小区的管理设备,第二设备还可以接收来自第四设备的第一信息。In a possible design, when the terminal device moves from the third cell to the first cell, the fourth device is a management device of the third cell, and the second device can also receive the first information from the fourth device.

采用这样的设计,第四设备(第三小区的管理设备,或者源基站)可以通过第二设备(核心网设备)透传的方式,向第一设备(第一小区的管理设备,或者源基站)发送第一信息,从而指示对第一设备第一会话的切换请求的处理方式。With such a design, the fourth device (the management device of the third cell, or the source base station) can send the first information to the first device (the management device of the first cell, or the source base station) by transparently transmitting through the second device (core network device), thereby indicating how to handle the switching request for the first session of the first device.

第三方面,本申请实施例提供一种通信方法,该方法包括:第三设备接收来自第一设备的第八消息;第八消息用于指示第一会话的资源建立成功;第一会话关联的网络切片为第一网络切片,且第一会话用于为终端设备提供第二网络切片对应的服务;第一设备为第一小区的管理设备,第一小区支持的网络切片列表包括第一网络切片的标识;当网络切片列表不包括第二网络切片的标识时,第三设备向第一设备发送第二响应消息;第二响应消息用于指示释放第一会话的准入资源;第三设备为核心网设备。In a third aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a communication method, the method comprising: a third device receives an eighth message from a first device; the eighth message is used to indicate that resources for a first session are successfully established; the network slice associated with the first session is the first network slice, and the first session is used to provide a service corresponding to a second network slice to a terminal device; the first device is a management device of a first cell, and a list of network slices supported by the first cell includes an identifier of the first network slice; when the network slice list does not include an identifier of the second network slice, the third device sends a second response message to the first device; the second response message is used to indicate the release of access resources for the first session; the third device is a core network device.

采用该方法,在第一设备向第三设备指示第一会话资源建立成功的前提下,当第一设备对应的第一小区支持的网络切片列表不包括第一会话实际服务的网络切片(第二网络切片,即原始S-NSSAI)时, 第三设备还可以向第一设备指示释放第一会话的准入资源,从而中断第一会话的切换流程,这样,能够提高会话切换的准确性,提高通信效率。其中,核心网设备指示目标基站对第一会话的处理方式的具体实现方法可以参考本申请实施例后续第四方面的论述,此处不进行赘述。Using this method, under the premise that the first device indicates to the third device that the first session resource is successfully established, when the network slice list supported by the first cell corresponding to the first device does not include the network slice actually served by the first session (the second network slice, that is, the original S-NSSAI), The third device may also instruct the first device to release the access resources of the first session, thereby interrupting the switching process of the first session, so as to improve the accuracy of session switching and improve communication efficiency. Among them, the specific implementation method of the core network device instructing the target base station to handle the first session can refer to the discussion of the fourth aspect of the subsequent embodiments of this application, which will not be repeated here.

在一种可能的设计中,第三设备确定第二网络切片为允许在终端设备的注册区域中部分区域内使用的网络切片;或者,第三设备确定第二网络切片为不允许在注册区域中部分区域内使用的网络切片。In one possible design, the third device determines that the second network slice is a network slice that is allowed to be used in a part of the registration area of the terminal device; or, the third device determines that the second network slice is a network slice that is not allowed to be used in a part of the registration area.

采用这样的设计,第三设备可以进一步判断第一会话实际服务的网络切片是否属于终端设备的注册区域中部分区域内允许使用的网络切片(或者注册区域中部分区域内拒绝使用的网络切片),从而可以提高会话切换的准确性,提高通信效率。With such a design, the third device can further determine whether the network slice actually served by the first session belongs to a network slice allowed for use in part of the registration area of the terminal device (or a network slice denied for use in part of the registration area), thereby improving the accuracy of session switching and improving communication efficiency.

第四方面,本申请实施例提供一种通信方法,该方法包括:第五设备接收切换请求,切换请求用于请求将第二会话切换至第六设备;第二会话关联的网络切片为第一网络切片,且第二会话用于为终端设备提供第二网络切片对应的服务;第五设备为核心网设备;第六设备是第一小区的管理设备,第一小区支持的网络切片列表包括第一网络切片的标识;当网络切片列表不包括第二网络切片的标识时,第五设备将第二会话去激活。In a fourth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a communication method, the method comprising: a fifth device receives a switching request, the switching request is used to request to switch a second session to a sixth device; the network slice associated with the second session is a first network slice, and the second session is used to provide a service corresponding to the second network slice to the terminal device; the fifth device is a core network device; the sixth device is a management device of a first cell, and the list of network slices supported by the first cell includes an identifier of the first network slice; when the network slice list does not include an identifier of the second network slice, the fifth device deactivates the second session.

采用该方法,当网络切片列表不包括第二网络切片的标识时,第五设备(核心网设备)可以对第二会话进行去激活,从而中断第二会话的切换流程,从而可以提高会话切换的准确性,提高通信效率。Using this method, when the network slice list does not include the identifier of the second network slice, the fifth device (core network device) can deactivate the second session, thereby interrupting the switching process of the second session, thereby improving the accuracy of session switching and improving communication efficiency.

在一种可能的设计中,第五设备还可以确定第二网络切片为允许在终端设备的注册区域中部分区域内使用的网络切片;或者,第五设备还可以确定第二网络切片为不允许在注册区域中部分区域内使用的网络切片。In one possible design, the fifth device may also determine that the second network slice is a network slice that is allowed to be used in a partial area of the registration area of the terminal device; or, the fifth device may also determine that the second network slice is a network slice that is not allowed to be used in a partial area of the registration area.

采用这样的设计,第五设备可以进一步判断第二会话实际服务的网络切片是否属于终端设备的注册区域中部分区域内允许使用的网络切片(或者注册区域中部分区域内拒绝使用的网络切片),从而可以提高会话切换的准确性,提高通信效率。With such a design, the fifth device can further determine whether the network slice actually served by the second session belongs to a network slice allowed for use in a part of the registration area of the terminal device (or a network slice denied for use in a part of the registration area), thereby improving the accuracy of session switching and improving communication efficiency.

在一种可能的设计中,第五设备可以通过以下方式将第二会话去激活:第五设备可以接收来自第六设备的第七消息;第七消息用于指示第六设备对第二会话的预处理方式为允许准入;当网络切片列表不包括第二网络切片的标识时,第五设备可以响应于第七消息将第二会话去激活。In one possible design, the fifth device may deactivate the second session in the following manner: the fifth device may receive a seventh message from the sixth device; the seventh message is used to indicate that the sixth device preprocesses the second session to allow access; when the network slice list does not include the identifier of the second network slice, the fifth device may deactivate the second session in response to the seventh message.

采用这样的设计,即使第五设备收到第六设备对第二会话的预处理方式为允许准入,第五设备也可以根据网络切片列表确定对第二会话进行去激活,从而可以提高会话切换的准确性,提高通信效率。With such a design, even if the fifth device receives a pre-processing signal from the sixth device that the second session is allowed access, the fifth device can also determine to deactivate the second session based on the network slice list, thereby improving the accuracy of session switching and improving communication efficiency.

在一种可能的设计中,第五设备接收来自第六设备的切换请求后,还可以向第六设备发送第四信息;第四信息用于指示释放第二会话的准入资源。In a possible design, after receiving the switching request from the sixth device, the fifth device may also send fourth information to the sixth device; the fourth information is used to indicate the release of access resources for the second session.

采用这样的设计,第五设备可以通过第四信息指示第六设备释放第二会话的准入资源,减少资源浪费。With such a design, the fifth device can instruct the sixth device to release the access resources of the second session through the fourth information, thereby reducing resource waste.

在一种可能的设计中,当切换请求用于请求将第二会话从第七设备切换至第六设备时,第五设备还可以接收来自第七设备的切换请求,第五设备还可以向第七设备发送第五信息,第五信息用于指示释放前述第七设备为第二会话分配的资源。In one possible design, when the switching request is used to request switching of the second session from the seventh device to the sixth device, the fifth device may also receive a switching request from the seventh device, and the fifth device may also send fifth information to the seventh device, where the fifth information is used to indicate the release of resources allocated by the aforementioned seventh device for the second session.

采用这样的设计,第六设备可以指示第七设备(源基站)释放为第二会话分配的资源,减少资源浪费。With such a design, the sixth device can instruct the seventh device (source base station) to release the resources allocated for the second session, thereby reducing resource waste.

第五方面,本申请还提供一种通信装置。该通信装置可以执行上述方法设计。该通信装置可以是能够执行上述方法对应的功能的芯片或电路,或者是包括该芯片或电路的设备。In a fifth aspect, the present application further provides a communication device. The communication device can execute the above method design. The communication device can be a chip or circuit capable of executing the function corresponding to the above method, or a device including the chip or circuit.

在一种可能的设计中,该通信装置包括通信单元,用于接收和发送数据;该通信装置还包括处理单元,用于实现以上方法中的步骤。前述功能可以通过硬件实现,也可以通过硬件执行相应的软件实现。硬件或软件包括一个或多个与上述功能相对应的单元。In one possible design, the communication device includes a communication unit for receiving and sending data; the communication device also includes a processing unit for implementing the steps in the above method. The above functions can be implemented by hardware, or by hardware executing corresponding software. The hardware or software includes one or more units corresponding to the above functions.

第六方面,本申请还提供一种通信设备。该通信设备可以执行上述方法设计。该通信设备包括:存储器,用于存储计算机可执行程序代码;以及处理器,处理器与存储器耦合。其中存储器所存储的程序代码包括指令,当处理器执行所述指令时,使该通信设备或者安装有该通信设备的设备执行上述任意一种可能的设计中的方法。In a sixth aspect, the present application further provides a communication device. The communication device can execute the above method design. The communication device includes: a memory for storing computer executable program code; and a processor, the processor being coupled to the memory. The program code stored in the memory includes instructions, and when the processor executes the instructions, the communication device or a device equipped with the communication device executes the method in any possible design above.

其中,该通信设备还可以包括通信接口;或者,如果该通信设备为芯片或电路,则通信接口可以是该芯片的输入/输出接口,例如输入/输出管脚等。 The communication device may further include a communication interface; or, if the communication device is a chip or a circuit, the communication interface may be an input/output interface of the chip, such as an input/output pin.

第七方面,本申请提供一种通信系统,所述通信系统包括执行第一方面的第一设备,和/或,执行第二方面的第二设备中的一个或多个装置。In a seventh aspect, the present application provides a communication system, which includes a first device that executes the first aspect, and/or one or more devices in a second device that executes the second aspect.

可选的,该通信系统还可以包括第三设备和/或第四设备。Optionally, the communication system may further include a third device and/or a fourth device.

第八方面,本申请提供一种通信系统,所述通信系统包括执行第四方面的第五设备,第六设备,和/或,第七设备中的一个或多个装置。In an eighth aspect, the present application provides a communication system, comprising one or more devices in the fifth device, the sixth device, and/or the seventh device that execute the fourth aspect.

第九方面,本申请提供一种计算机可读存储介质,所述计算机可读存储介质存储有计算机程序,当所述计算机程序在装置上运行时,执行上述任意一种可能的设计中的方法。In a ninth aspect, the present application provides a computer-readable storage medium, wherein the computer-readable storage medium stores a computer program, and when the computer program runs on a device, it executes the method in any one of the possible designs described above.

第十方面,本申请提供一种计算机程序产品,所述计算机程序产品包括计算机程序,当所述计算机程序在装置上运行时,执行上述任意一种可能的设计中的方法。In a tenth aspect, the present application provides a computer program product, which includes a computer program. When the computer program runs on a device, it executes the method in any possible design described above.

第十一方面,本申请提供一种芯片,该芯片包括处理器和存储器;处理器与存储器耦合,用于读取存储器中存储的计算机程序,执行上述任意一种可能的设计中的方法。In an eleventh aspect, the present application provides a chip comprising a processor and a memory; the processor is coupled to the memory and is used to read a computer program stored in the memory and execute a method in any possible design described above.

另外,第五方面至第十一方面所带来的技术效果可参见上述第一方面至第四方面的描述,此处不再赘述。In addition, the technical effects brought about by the fifth to eleventh aspects can be found in the description of the first to fourth aspects above, and will not be repeated here.

附图说明BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS

图1为本申请实施例提供的一种通信系统的结构图;FIG1 is a structural diagram of a communication system provided in an embodiment of the present application;

图2为本申请实施例提供的一种通信场景示意图;FIG2 is a schematic diagram of a communication scenario provided in an embodiment of the present application;

图3为本申请实施例提供的另一种通信场景示意图;FIG3 is a schematic diagram of another communication scenario provided in an embodiment of the present application;

图4为本申请实施例提供的另一种通信场景示意图;FIG4 is a schematic diagram of another communication scenario provided in an embodiment of the present application;

图5为本申请实施例提供的一种通信方法的流程示意图;FIG5 is a flow chart of a communication method provided in an embodiment of the present application;

图6为本申请实施例提供的另一种通信方法的流程示意图;FIG6 is a flow chart of another communication method provided in an embodiment of the present application;

图7为本申请实施例提供的另一种通信方法的流程示意图;FIG7 is a flow chart of another communication method provided in an embodiment of the present application;

图8为本申请实施例提供的一种通信方法的流程示意图;FIG8 is a flow chart of a communication method provided in an embodiment of the present application;

图9为本申请实施例提供的另一种通信方法的流程示意图;FIG9 is a schematic diagram of a flow chart of another communication method provided in an embodiment of the present application;

图10为本申请实施例提供的另一种通信方法的流程示意图;FIG10 is a schematic diagram of a flow chart of another communication method provided in an embodiment of the present application;

图11为本申请实施例提供的一种通信方法的示例图;FIG11 is an exemplary diagram of a communication method provided in an embodiment of the present application;

图12为本申请实施例提供的另一种通信方法的示例图;FIG12 is an exemplary diagram of another communication method provided in an embodiment of the present application;

图13为本申请实施例提供的一种通信装置的结构示意图;FIG13 is a schematic diagram of the structure of a communication device provided in an embodiment of the present application;

图14为本申请实施例提供的另一种通信设备的结构示意图。FIG14 is a schematic diagram of the structure of another communication device provided in an embodiment of the present application.

具体实施方式DETAILED DESCRIPTION

为了使本申请的目的、技术方案及有益效果更加清楚明白,以下结合附图及实施例,对本申请进行进一步详细说明。应当理解,此处所描述的具体实施例仅仅用以解释本申请,并不用于限定本申请。In order to make the purpose, technical solution and beneficial effects of the present application more clearly understood, the present application is further described in detail below in conjunction with the accompanying drawings and embodiments. It should be understood that the specific embodiments described herein are only used to explain the present application and are not used to limit the present application.

在本申请的描述中,除非另有说明,“/”表示或的意思,例如,A/B可以表示A或B;本申请中的“和/或”仅仅是一种描述关联对象的关联关系,表示可以存在三种关系,例如,A和/或B,可以表示:单独存在A,同时存在A和B,单独存在B这三种情况。另外,在本申请的描述中,“至少一项”是指一项或者多项,“多项”是指两项或两项以上。在本申请的描述中,“第一”、“第二”等词汇,仅用于区分描述的目的,而不能理解为指示或暗示相对重要性,也不能理解为指示或暗示顺序。本申请实施例中,“当……时”、“在……情况下”、“若……,则”可表示相同的含义,彼此之前可以相互替换。In the description of the present application, unless otherwise specified, "/" means or, for example, A/B can mean A or B; "and/or" in the present application is only a kind of association relationship describing the associated objects, indicating that there can be three relationships, for example, A and/or B can mean: A exists alone, A and B exist at the same time, and B exists alone. In addition, in the description of the present application, "at least one" refers to one or more items, and "multiple items" refers to two or more items. In the description of the present application, words such as "first" and "second" are only used to distinguish the purpose of description, and cannot be understood as indicating or implying relative importance, nor can they be understood as indicating or implying order. In the embodiment of the present application, "when...", "under...", and "if..." can represent the same meaning and can be replaced with each other.

下面对本申请涉及的术语进行解释:The following is an explanation of the terms involved in this application:

(1)TA,是为终端设备的位置管理设立的概念。终端设备和核心网设备均可获知终端设备的TA。TA是运营商针对小区级的配置,多个小区可以配置相同的TA,且一个小区只能属于一个TA。每个TA可通过跟踪区域码(tracking area code,TAC)或者跟踪区域标识(tracking area identity,TAI)来指示,其中,TAI由公共陆地移动网(public land mobile network,PLMN)标识和TAC组成。(1)TA is a concept established for the location management of terminal devices. Both terminal devices and core network devices can obtain the TA of the terminal device. TA is an operator's configuration at the cell level. Multiple cells can be configured with the same TA, and a cell can only belong to one TA. Each TA can be indicated by a tracking area code (TAC) or a tracking area identity (TAI), where TAI is composed of a public land mobile network (PLMN) identity and a TAC.

(2)RA,是核心网设备在终端设备注册时,为终端设备确定的一个范围。核心网可以在RA内对终端设备进行跟踪。RA可包括一个或多个TA,每个RA可由其包含的TA的标识如TAC/TAI来指示。例如,RA={TAC#1,TAC#2},这表示:RA包括TAC#1标识的TA和TAC#2标识的TA。一种实现中, 核心网设备可通过向终端设备发送的注册接受(registration accept)消息来指示终端设备的RA。(2) RA is a range determined by the core network device for the terminal device when the terminal device registers. The core network can track the terminal device within the RA. RA may include one or more TAs, and each RA may be indicated by the identifier of the TA it contains, such as TAC/TAI. For example, RA = {TAC#1, TAC#2}, which means: RA includes the TA identified by TAC#1 and the TA identified by TAC#2. In one implementation, The core network device may indicate the RA of the terminal device by sending a registration accept message to the terminal device.

(3)网络切片。物理网络可以被抽象划分成多个切片,每个切片构成一个端到端的逻辑子网,不同切片之间在逻辑上是隔离的。每个切片可以按照需求,灵活地提供一种或多种网络服务,并且和其它切片互不影响。(3) Network slicing. The physical network can be abstractly divided into multiple slices. Each slice constitutes an end-to-end logical subnet. Different slices are logically isolated. Each slice can flexibly provide one or more network services according to demand and will not affect other slices.

不同逻辑子网可以由S-NSSAI来标识和区分。每个S-NSSAI可以包括以下至少之一:切片/业务类型(slice/service type,SST),切片区分项(slice differentiator,SD)。其中,SST可指示切片特定的特征和业务类型;SD作为SST的补充,可进一步区分满足相同SST的多个切片实例,SD是可选的。Different logical subnets can be identified and distinguished by S-NSSAI. Each S-NSSAI can include at least one of the following: slice/service type (SST), slice differentiator (SD). Among them, SST can indicate slice-specific characteristics and service types; SD, as a supplement to SST, can further distinguish multiple slice instances that meet the same SST, and SD is optional.

本申请中,S-NSSAI可用于指示一个切片;NSSAI为S-NSSAI列表(list),可包括一个或多个S-NSSAI,即包括一个或多个切片。In the present application, S-NSSAI may be used to indicate a slice; NSSAI is an S-NSSAI list, which may include one or more S-NSSAIs, that is, one or more slices.

一种实现中,一个小区支持的切片列表是由操作管理和维护(operation administration and maintenance,OAM)设备按照TA粒度预先配置的,以该小区对应的管理设备为基站为例,基站可以在与核心网设备建立NG接口时将该预先配置的切片列表上报给核心网设备;也就是说,基站侧对于切片的支持是符合TA均质部署,特定TA内所有小区支持相同的切片。如果该基站还可以支持集中单元(centralized unit,CU)/分布单元(distributed unit,DU)分离,进一步地,DU需要先将每个TA支持的S-NSSAI列表发送给CU,再由CU上报给核心网设备。In one implementation, the slice list supported by a cell is pre-configured by the operation administration and maintenance (OAM) device according to the TA granularity. Taking the management device corresponding to the cell as a base station as an example, the base station can report the pre-configured slice list to the core network device when establishing an NG interface with the core network device; that is, the support for slices on the base station side is in line with TA homogeneous deployment, and all cells in a specific TA support the same slices. If the base station can also support centralized unit (CU)/distributed unit (DU) separation, further, the DU needs to first send the S-NSSAI list supported by each TA to the CU, and then the CU reports it to the core network device.

一种实现中,NSSAI的类型可包括以下七种:In one implementation, the types of NSSAI may include the following seven types:

第一种:请求NSSAI(Requested NSSAI):可包括终端设备请求的网络切片。例如,若请求NSSAI包括切片#1和切片#2,则终端设备请求的网络切片为切片#1和切片#2。The first type: Requested NSSAI: may include the network slices requested by the terminal device. For example, if the requested NSSAI includes slice #1 and slice #2, the network slices requested by the terminal device are slice #1 and slice #2.

一种实现中,请求NSSAI可携带在注册请求(registration request)消息中。In one implementation, the requested NSSAI may be carried in a registration request message.

第二种:允许NSSAI(Allowed NSSAI):可包括终端设备的请求NSSAI中,被网络侧允许的S-NSSAI。一种实现中,允许NSSAI可通过注册接受(registration accept)消息中的允许NSSAI(Allowed NSSAI)信元来指示。该允许NSSAI可包括RA中全部区域内允许使用的网络切片。例如,若允许NSSAI包括切片#1,RA包括TAC#1标识的TA,则在TAC#1标识的TA内允许使用的网络切片为切片#1。The second type: Allowed NSSAI: may include the S-NSSAI allowed by the network side in the requested NSSAI of the terminal device. In one implementation, the allowed NSSAI may be indicated by the allowed NSSAI (Allowed NSSAI) information element in the registration accept message. The allowed NSSAI may include network slices allowed for use in all areas in the RA. For example, if the allowed NSSAI includes slice #1, and the RA includes a TA identified by TAC#1, then the network slice allowed for use in the TA identified by TAC#1 is slice #1.

第三种:拒绝NSSAI(Rejected NSSAI):可包括终端设备的请求NSSAI中,被网络侧拒绝的S-NSSAI。该拒绝NSSAI可包括RA中全部区域内拒绝使用的网络切片。例如,若拒绝NSSAI包括切片#1,RA包括TAC#1标识的TA,则在TAC#1标识的TA内拒绝使用的网络切片为切片#1。一种实现中,拒绝NSSAI可通过注册接受消息中的拒绝NSSAI(Rejected NSSAI)信元来指示。该拒绝NSSAI也可指示RA中被部分拒绝的NSSAI(Rejected S-NSSAI(s)Partially in the RA),即RA中部分区域内拒绝使用的网络切片。例如,若RA包括TAC#1标识的TA和TAC#2标识的TA,切片#2不能被TAC#1标识的TA支持或者切片#2仅能被TAC#2标识的TA支持,则RA中被部分拒绝的NSSAI包括切片#2。The third type: Rejected NSSAI: may include the S-NSSAI rejected by the network side in the request NSSAI of the terminal device. The rejected NSSAI may include the network slices rejected for use in all areas of the RA. For example, if the rejected NSSAI includes slice #1, and the RA includes the TA identified by TAC#1, then the network slice rejected for use in the TA identified by TAC#1 is slice #1. In one implementation, the rejected NSSAI may be indicated by the rejected NSSAI (Rejected NSSAI) information element in the registration acceptance message. The rejected NSSAI may also indicate the partially rejected NSSAI in the RA (Rejected S-NSSAI(s) Partially in the RA), that is, the network slices rejected for use in some areas of the RA. For example, if the RA includes the TA identified by TAC#1 and the TA identified by TAC#2, and slice #2 cannot be supported by the TA identified by TAC#1 or slice #2 can only be supported by the TA identified by TAC#2, then the partially rejected NSSAI in the RA includes slice #2.

一种实现中,RA中被部分拒绝的NSSAI可由拒绝NSSAI的被拒绝原因来指示。例如,被拒绝原因是在RA中被部分拒绝,终端设备基于RA中被部分拒绝的NSSAI可以在RA中能够支持该NSSAI的区域内重新请求对应的切片服务。In one implementation, the partially rejected NSSAI in the RA may be indicated by the rejection reason for rejecting the NSSAI. For example, the rejection reason is partial rejection in the RA, and the terminal device may re-request the corresponding slice service in the area that can support the NSSAI in the RA based on the partially rejected NSSAI in the RA.

第四种:部分允许NSSAI(Partially Allowed NSSAI):可包括终端设备的请求NSSAI中,被网络侧部分允许的S-NSSAI。该部分允许NSSAI可包括RA中部分区域内允许使用的网络切片。例如,若RA包括TAC#1标识的TA和TAC#2标识的TA,切片#2不能被TAC#1标识的TA支持或者切片#2仅能被TAC#2标识的TA支持,则部分允许NSSAI包括切片#2。The fourth type: Partially Allowed NSSAI: It may include the S-NSSAI that is partially allowed by the network side in the requested NSSAI of the terminal device. The partially allowed NSSAI may include network slices that are allowed to be used in some areas in the RA. For example, if the RA includes a TA identified by TAC#1 and a TA identified by TAC#2, and slice #2 cannot be supported by the TA identified by TAC#1 or slice #2 can only be supported by the TA identified by TAC#2, then the partially allowed NSSAI includes slice #2.

一种实现中,部分允许NSSAI可通过注册接受消息中的部分允许NSSAI(Partially Allowed NSSAI)信元来指示。In one implementation, partially allowed NSSAI may be indicated via a Partially Allowed NSSAI element in a Registration Accept message.

一些示例中,部分允许NSSAI和/或RA中被部分拒绝的NSSAI可与TA列表结合使用,指示RA中部分区域内允许和/或拒绝使用的网络切片。该TA列表可以为RA中能够支持部分允许NSSAI和/或RA中被部分拒绝的NSSAI的TA列表。例如,若RA包括TAC#1标识的TA和TAC#2标识的TA,切片#2不能被TAC#1标识的TA支持或者切片#2仅能被TAC#2标识的TA支持,部分允许NSSAI或者RA中被部分拒绝的NSSAI包括切片#2,则能够支持对应NSSAI的TA列表包括TAC#2标识的TA。另外,该TA列表也可以为RA中不能支持部分允许NSSAI和/或RA中被部分拒绝的NSSAI的TA列表,在这种情况下,上例中,部分允许NSSAI或者RA中被部分拒绝的NSSAI包括切片#2,则不能支持对应NSSAI的TA列表包括TAC#1标识的TA。In some examples, partially allowed NSSAI and/or partially rejected NSSAI in RA may be used in conjunction with a TA list to indicate network slices allowed and/or rejected in some areas of RA. The TA list may be a list of TAs in RA that can support partially allowed NSSAI and/or partially rejected NSSAI in RA. For example, if RA includes a TA identified by TAC#1 and a TA identified by TAC#2, slice #2 cannot be supported by the TA identified by TAC#1 or slice #2 can only be supported by the TA identified by TAC#2, and the partially allowed NSSAI or partially rejected NSSAI in RA includes slice #2, then the TA list that can support the corresponding NSSAI includes the TA identified by TAC#2. In addition, the TA list may also be a list of TAs in RA that cannot support partially allowed NSSAI and/or partially rejected NSSAI in RA. In this case, in the above example, the partially allowed NSSAI or partially rejected NSSAI in RA includes slice #2, then the TA list that cannot support the corresponding NSSAI includes the TA identified by TAC#1.

又一些示例中,该允许NSSAI、部分允许NSSAI和RA中被部分拒绝的NSSAI中的一个或多个可 与服务区域结合使用,指示RA中部分区域内允许和/或拒绝使用的网络切片。其中,该服务区域也可称为网络切片服务区域(Network Slice Area of Service,NS-AoS),用于指示RA中为对应NSSAI中的切片分配了资源或者没有分配资源的区域,该区域可为根据TA和小区列表确定的区域。例如,若RA包括TAC#1标识的TA,TAC#1标识的TA内包括小区#1至小区#4,但小区#2中没有为切片#2分配资源,切片#2属于允许NSSAI、部分允许NSSAI或RA中被部分拒绝的NSSAI,则针对切片#2的服务区域包括TAC#1标识的TA内的小区#1、小区#3和小区#4。In some other examples, one or more of the allowed NSSAI, the partially allowed NSSAI, and the partially rejected NSSAI in the RA may be Used in conjunction with the service area, it indicates the network slices that are allowed and/or denied in some areas of the RA. The service area may also be referred to as the Network Slice Area of Service (NS-AoS), which is used to indicate the area in the RA where resources are allocated or not allocated for the slice in the corresponding NSSAI, and the area may be an area determined based on the TA and the cell list. For example, if the RA includes a TA identified by TAC#1, and the TA identified by TAC#1 includes cells #1 to #4, but no resources are allocated to slice #2 in cell #2, and slice #2 belongs to an NSSAI that is allowed, partially allowed, or partially denied in the RA, then the service area for slice #2 includes cells #1, #3, and #4 in the TA identified by TAC#1.

应理解,部分允许NSSAI、RA中被部分拒绝的NSSAI和服务区域等也可采用其他名称,只要实现相同的功能即可。It should be understood that the partially allowed NSSAI, the partially denied NSSAI in the RA, and the service area, etc. may also be named by other names as long as the same functions are achieved.

第五种:订阅NSSAI(Subscribed NSSAI):属于用户的订阅数据。Fifth type: Subscribed NSSAI: Subscription data belonging to the user.

第六种:默认NSSAI(Default NSSAI):根据运营商的策略,用户的订阅NSSAI中可能会一个或多个被设置为默认NSSAI。如果终端设备在注册请求消息(registration request)中没有携带Allowed NSSAI,且存在默认NSSAI,则网络侧会使用默认NSSAI来给终端设备提供服务。Type 6: Default NSSAI: According to the operator's policy, one or more of the user's subscribed NSSAIs may be set as the default NSSAI. If the terminal device does not carry the Allowed NSSAI in the registration request message (registration request), and there is a default NSSAI, the network side will use the default NSSAI to provide services to the terminal device.

第七种:配置NSSAI(Configured NSSAI):网络侧配置给终端设备使用的NSSAI,终端设备在收到配置NSSAI相关的参数后,终端设备即可确定当前网络下有哪些S-NSSAI(s)是可用的。网络侧会在注册接收消息(registration accept)的“配置NSSAI”信元中携带该配置NSSAI相关的参数;如果注册后终端设备的配置有变化,则网络侧在配置更新命令(configuration update command)中携带配置NSSAI相关的参数,以使终端设备更新;终端设备会在非易失存储空间保存每个网络侧对应的配置NSSAI;每个PLMN最多只能配置一个配置NSSAI。Seventh type: Configured NSSAI: The network side configures the NSSAI for the terminal device to use. After receiving the parameters related to the configured NSSAI, the terminal device can determine which S-NSSAI(s) are available in the current network. The network side will carry the parameters related to the configured NSSAI in the "Configured NSSAI" information element of the registration accept message; if the configuration of the terminal device changes after registration, the network side will carry the parameters related to the configured NSSAI in the configuration update command to update the terminal device; the terminal device will save the corresponding configured NSSAI of each network side in the non-volatile storage space; each PLMN can only be configured with one configured NSSAI at most.

(4)会话,为移动通信系统中的会话管理网元针对终端设备建立的终端设备、接入网设备、用户面网元以及数据网络(data network,DN)之间的连接,用于传输终端设备和DN之间的用户面数据。会话例如为协议数据单元(protocol data unit,PDU)会话。(4) Session: A connection between a terminal device, access network device, user plane network element, and data network (DN) established by a session management network element in a mobile communication system for a terminal device, and used to transmit user plane data between the terminal device and the DN. A session is, for example, a protocol data unit (PDU) session.

终端设备可以与移动通信系统(例如,5G系统)建立一个或者多个PDU会话,每个PDU会话中可以建立一个或者多个QoS流(flow)。每个QoS流用于传输一个业务中同一QoS需求(可靠性或时延)的数据。QoS流可由QoS流标识(QoS flow identifier,QFI)来标识。The terminal device can establish one or more PDU sessions with the mobile communication system (for example, 5G system), and one or more QoS flows can be established in each PDU session. Each QoS flow is used to transmit data with the same QoS requirement (reliability or latency) in a service. QoS flows can be identified by QoS flow identifiers (QFI).

下面介绍本申请所提供的方法应用的通信系统的架构。The following introduces the architecture of the communication system to which the method provided in this application is applied.

图1示出了本申请实施例适用的一种通信系统的架构图,该通信系统包括终端设备、接入网(core network)设备和核心网设备。可选的,该通信系统可以包括多个终端设备和多个接入网设备。FIG1 shows an architecture diagram of a communication system applicable to an embodiment of the present application, wherein the communication system includes a terminal device, an access network (core network) device, and a core network device. Optionally, the communication system may include multiple terminal devices and multiple access network devices.

终端设备(terminal device),是一种具有无线收发功能的设备,可以部署在陆地上,包括室内或室外、手持或车载;也可以部署在水面上(如轮船等);还可以部署在空中(例如飞机、气球和卫星等)。终端设备可以是手机(mobile phone)、平板电脑(pad)、带无线收发功能的电脑、虚拟现实(virtual reality,VR)终端、增强现实(augmented reality,AR)终端、工业控制(industrial control)中的无线终端、无人驾驶(self driving)中的无线终端、远程医疗(remote medical)中的无线终端、智能电网(smart grid)中的无线终端、运输安全(transportation safety)中的无线终端、智慧城市(smart city)中的无线终端、智慧家庭(smart home)中的无线终端、用户设备(user equipment,UE)等。终端设备可以实现用户接入网络的功能。Terminal device is a device with wireless transceiver function, which can be deployed on land, including indoors or outdoors, handheld or vehicle-mounted; it can also be deployed on the water (such as ships, etc.); it can also be deployed in the air (such as airplanes, balloons and satellites, etc.). Terminal devices can be mobile phones, tablet computers, computers with wireless transceiver functions, virtual reality (VR) terminals, augmented reality (AR) terminals, wireless terminals in industrial control, wireless terminals in self-driving, wireless terminals in remote medical, wireless terminals in smart grids, wireless terminals in transportation safety, wireless terminals in smart cities, wireless terminals in smart homes, user equipment (UE), etc. Terminal devices can realize the function of user access to the network.

接入网设备,是无线网络中的设备,例如包括将终端设备接入到无线网络的无线接入网(radio access network,RAN)节点,或无线接入网设备。目前,一些接入网设备的举例包括:5G中的下一代基站(gNodeB,gNB)、传输接收点(transmission reception point,TRP)、演进型节点B(evolved Node B,eNB)、无线网络控制器(radio network controller,RNC)、节点B(Node B,NB)、基站控制器(base station controller,BSC)、基站收发台(base transceiver station,BTS)、家庭基站(例如,home evolved NodeB,或home Node B,HNB)、基带单元(base band unit,BBU)、无线保真(wireless fidelity,Wifi)接入点(access point,AP)、接入回传一体化(integrated access and backhaul,IAB)等。一种实现中,该接入网设备也可以是未来通信系统(如6G通信系统)中的接入网设备。在本申请实施例中,不同小区可能为终端设备提供不同网络切片对应的服务,接入网设备即为各个小区的管理设备。Access network equipment is equipment in a wireless network, such as a radio access network (RAN) node or a radio access network device that connects a terminal device to a wireless network. At present, some examples of access network equipment include: next-generation base stations (gNodeB, gNB) in 5G, transmission reception points (TRP), evolved Node B (eNB), radio network controller (RNC), Node B (NB), base station controller (BSC), base transceiver station (BTS), home base station (e.g., home evolved NodeB, or home Node B, HNB), base band unit (BBU), wireless fidelity (Wifi) access point (AP), integrated access and backhaul (IAB), etc. In one implementation, the access network device may also be an access network device in a future communication system (such as a 6G communication system). In an embodiment of the present application, different cells may provide services corresponding to different network slices for terminal devices, and the access network device is the management device of each cell.

核心网设备提供用户连接、对用户的管理以及对业务完成承载,作为承载网络提供到外部网络的接口。核心网设备可以包括以下至少一个网元:移动管理网元、会话管理网元、用户面网元、数据管理网元(例如,统一数据管理(unified data management,UDM)网元)、统一数据库(unified data repository, UDR)网元、网络开放网元(例如,网络开放功能(network exposure function,NEF)网元)、策略控制网元(例如,策略控制功能(policy control function,PCF)网元)或网络存储功能(network repository function,NRF)网元等。下面分别对其中的部分网元进行说明。The core network equipment provides user connection, user management, and service bearer, and provides an interface to the external network as a bearer network. The core network equipment may include at least one of the following network elements: a mobility management network element, a session management network element, a user plane network element, a data management network element (e.g., a unified data management (UDM) network element), a unified data repository (UDM), and a The network elements include network exposure function (NEF) network element, policy control network element (PCF) network element) or network repository function (NRF) network element. Some of these network elements are described below.

AMF,是第五代(the 5th generation,5G)核心网的主要功能单元,负责进行接入控制及移动性管理能力,并确保终端设备在移动过程中的业务连续性能力。在5G中,移动性管理网元可以是接入与移动性管理功能(access and mobility management function,AMF)网元,在未来通信如第六代(the 6th generation,6G)中,移动性管理网元仍可以是AMF网元,或有其它的名称,本申请不做限定。AMF is the main functional unit of the fifth generation (5G) core network, responsible for access control and mobility management capabilities, and ensuring the service continuity of terminal devices during mobility. In 5G, the mobility management network element can be an access and mobility management function (AMF) network element. In future communications such as the sixth generation (6G), the mobility management network element can still be an AMF network element, or have other names, which are not limited in this application.

SMF,负责管理终端设备的分组数据单元(packet data unit,PDU)会话。PDU会话是一个用于传输PDU的通道,终端设备需要通过PDU会话与DN互相传送PDU。PDU会话由SMF网元负责建立、维护和删除等。会话管理网元的功能包括:会话管理(如会话建立、修改和释放,包含用户面网元和接入网设备之间的隧道维护)、用户面网元的选择和控制、业务和会话连续性(service and session continuity,SSC)模式选择、漫游等。在5G中,会话管理网元可以是会话管理功能(session management function,SMF)网元,在未来通信如6G中,会话管理网元仍可以是SMF网元,或有其它名称但具有全部或部分会话管理网元的功能的网元,本申请不做限定。SMF is responsible for managing the packet data unit (PDU) session of the terminal device. The PDU session is a channel for transmitting PDU. The terminal device needs to transmit PDU to each other with the DN through the PDU session. The PDU session is established, maintained and deleted by the SMF network element. The functions of the session management network element include: session management (such as session establishment, modification and release, including tunnel maintenance between user plane network elements and access network devices), selection and control of user plane network elements, service and session continuity (SSC) mode selection, roaming, etc. In 5G, the session management network element can be a session management function (SMF) network element. In future communications such as 6G, the session management network element can still be an SMF network element, or a network element with other names but with all or part of the functions of a session management network element. This application does not limit it.

目前,在终端设备的RA内,不同小区可能为终端设备提供不同网络切片对应的服务。这样,当终端设备在不同小区之间移动时,各个小区的管理设备(即接入网设备)之间可能要切换和/或释放网络切片关联的会话。Currently, in the RA of a terminal device, different cells may provide services corresponding to different network slices for the terminal device. In this way, when the terminal device moves between different cells, the management devices (i.e., access network devices) of each cell may need to switch and/or release the sessions associated with the network slices.

在一种场景示例中,签约了切片业务的终端设备在初始入网时,可以通过在无线资源控制(radio resource control,RRC)建立完成(setup complete)消息携带Requested NSSAI,来发起针对特定网络切片的注册请求。前述RRC setup complete消息经由基站透传(基站并不解析注册请求)至核心网侧后,由核心网设备结合统一数据管理功能(unified data management,UDM)网元中终端设备的签约信息(即订阅NSSAI)来决定网络侧(包括RAN侧和核心网侧)是否能够对该网络切片业务提供服务。In one scenario example, when a terminal device that has signed up for a slice service initially joins the network, it can initiate a registration request for a specific network slice by carrying the Requested NSSAI in the radio resource control (RRC) setup complete message. After the aforementioned RRC setup complete message is transparently transmitted to the core network side via the base station (the base station does not parse the registration request), the core network device combines the subscription information of the terminal device in the unified data management (UDM) network element (i.e., subscribed NSSAI) to determine whether the network side (including the RAN side and the core network side) can provide services for the network slice service.

基于该情景示例,各设备之间关于提供网络切片对应的服务的通信方式包括以下方式A、方式B和方式C。Based on this scenario example, the communication methods between devices for providing services corresponding to the network slice include the following methods A, B and C.

方式A:Method A:

若核心网设备确认当前网络可以支持该Requested NSSAI对应的业务,则会通过注册请求消息(registration request)向终端设备返回Allowed NSSAI和终端设备的RA范围(通过TAC/TAI列表表示);若核心网设备确认当前网络不能支持Requested NSSAI中的部分或全部S-NSSAI(s),则会通过registration accept消息向终端设备返回Allowed NSSAI和/或Rejected NSSAI(即Requested NSSAI中无法由当前网络支持的S-NSSAI(s))以及终端设备的RA范围。相应的,当终端设备在RA范围内移动时,终端设备无法针对Rejected NSSAI重新发起注册请求。If the core network device confirms that the current network can support the service corresponding to the Requested NSSAI, it will return the Allowed NSSAI and the RA range of the terminal device (indicated by the TAC/TAI list) to the terminal device through a registration request message (registration request); if the core network device confirms that the current network cannot support some or all of the S-NSSAI(s) in the Requested NSSAI, it will return the Allowed NSSAI and/or Rejected NSSAI (i.e., the S-NSSAI(s) in the Requested NSSAI that cannot be supported by the current network) and the RA range of the terminal device to the terminal device through a registration accept message. Accordingly, when the terminal device moves within the RA range, the terminal device cannot re-initiate a registration request for the Rejected NSSAI.

例如,如图2所示,TAC#1标识的TA内的小区只支持切片#1;TAC#2标识的TA内的小区支持切片#1和切片#2。终端设备可以在TAC#1标识的TA内发起注册请求(携带Requested NSSAI=切片#1,切片#2);由于TAC#1标识的TA不能支持切片#2,因此核心网设备在接收到终端设备的注册请求后,结合终端设备的Subscribed NSSAI以及基站侧对于网络切片的支持情况,向终端设备发送registration accept消息(携带:Allowed NSSAI=切片#1,Rejected NSSAI=切片#2,RA={TAC#1})。基于此,终端设备的RA包括TAC#1标识的TA,且不包括TAC#2标识的TA。其中,“{}”在本申请中代表列表,“=”在本申请中代表“包括”,此处用于对Allowed NSSAI、Rejected NSSAI或RA进行解释,后续不再重复赘述。当终端设备在RA内移动时,无法再次针对切片#2发起注册请求。For example, as shown in FIG2 , the cells in the TA identified by TAC#1 only support slice #1; the cells in the TA identified by TAC#2 support slice #1 and slice #2. The terminal device can initiate a registration request in the TA identified by TAC#1 (carrying Requested NSSAI = slice #1, slice #2); since the TA identified by TAC#1 cannot support slice #2, after receiving the registration request of the terminal device, the core network device combines the Subscribed NSSAI of the terminal device and the support of the network slice on the base station side, and sends a registration accept message to the terminal device (carrying: Allowed NSSAI = slice #1, Rejected NSSAI = slice #2, RA = {TAC#1}). Based on this, the RA of the terminal device includes the TA identified by TAC#1, and does not include the TA identified by TAC#2. Among them, "{}" in this application represents a list, and "=" in this application represents "include", which is used here to explain Allowed NSSAI, Rejected NSSAI or RA, and will not be repeated later. When the terminal device moves within the RA, it cannot initiate a registration request for slice #2 again.

在一些设计中,终端设备可以基于Allowed NSSAI向核心网设备发起会话建立请求(可以通过基站透传非接入层(non-access stratum,NAS)消息)。核心网设备确定能支持该会话后,向终端设备的当前小区的管理设备(例如基站)发送会话资源建立请求,即一个会话关联一个网络切片(即关联该网络切片的S-NSSAI)。基站判断并确定可以为当前会话分配资源后,在空口新建至少一个对应的DRB资源。In some designs, the terminal device can initiate a session establishment request to the core network device based on the Allowed NSSAI (the non-access stratum (NAS) message can be transparently transmitted through the base station). After the core network device determines that it can support the session, it sends a session resource establishment request to the management device of the current cell of the terminal device (such as the base station), that is, one session is associated with one network slice (that is, the S-NSSAI associated with the network slice). After the base station determines and determines that resources can be allocated for the current session, it creates at least one corresponding DRB resource on the air interface.

考虑到终端设备的移动性,基站侧可以实现基于网络切片的切换准入控制。例如,当终端设备需要进行站间切换时,源基站会向目标基站发送已经建立的会话及其关联的网络切片;然后,目标基站可以基于自身对于网络切片的支持情况决定是否接受上述会话的准入;假设存在目标基站不支持的PDU会 话,则目标基站会拒绝该PDU会话的准入,相应的,源基站在终端设备切换到目标基站后也会释放该会话对应的资源。换句话说,在终端设备当前所在的小区切换为目标基站后,该PDU会话在源基站和目标基站侧均被释放。Considering the mobility of terminal devices, the base station side can implement handover admission control based on network slices. For example, when a terminal device needs to perform inter-station handover, the source base station will send the established session and its associated network slice to the target base station; then, the target base station can decide whether to accept the admission of the above session based on its own support for network slices; if there is a PDU that the target base station does not support, If the target base station refuses to admit the PDU session, the source base station will release the resources corresponding to the session after the terminal device switches to the target base station. In other words, after the cell where the terminal device is currently located switches to the target base station, the PDU session is released on both the source base station and the target base station.

应理解,受限于RA的范围,方式A中的会话均只能关联Allowed NSSAI。It should be understood that, limited by the scope of RA, sessions in mode A can only be associated with Allowed NSSAI.

方式B:Method B:

终端设备的RA支持的网络切片可以通过以下至少一项来表示:允许NSSAI、部分允许NSSAI,和/或,部分拒绝NSSAI。这样,能够在方式A的基础上,扩大终端设备的RA的范围,以使终端设备在切换至支持部分允许NSSAI(或部分拒绝NSSAI)的TA时,终端设备可以重新发起针对部分允许NSSAI(或部分拒绝NSSAI)的注册请求,从而可以建立与部分允许NSSAI(或部分拒绝NSSAI)相关联的会话。The network slices supported by the RA of the terminal device may be represented by at least one of the following: allowing NSSAI, partially allowing NSSAI, and/or partially rejecting NSSAI. In this way, on the basis of method A, the scope of the RA of the terminal device can be expanded, so that when the terminal device switches to a TA that supports partially allowing NSSAI (or partially rejecting NSSAI), the terminal device can re-initiate a registration request for partially allowing NSSAI (or partially rejecting NSSAI), so that a session associated with partially allowing NSSAI (or partially rejecting NSSAI) can be established.

例如,如图3所示,TAC#1标识的TA内的小区支持切片#1,TAC#2标识的TA内的小区支持切片#1和切片#2。终端设备的请求NSSAI包括切片#1和切片#2,则核心网设备可以向终端设备发送registration accept消息(携带:Allowed NSSAI=切片#1,Partially Allowed NSSAI=切片#2(能被TAC#2标识的TA支持),RA={TAC#1,TAC#2};或者,携带:Allowed NSSAI=切片#1,Partially Rejected NSSAI=切片#2能被TAC#2标识的TA支持/不能被TAC#1标识的TA支持)),RA={TAC#1,TAC#2})。显然,终端设备的RA包括TAC#1标识的TA和TAC#2标识的TA;切片#2能被TAC#2标识的TA支持/不能被TAC#1标识的TA支持。这样,终端设备在当前RA内移动时,例如移动到TAC#2标识的TA内时,可以针对切片#2再次发起注册请求。For example, as shown in FIG3 , the cells within the TA identified by TAC#1 support slice #1, and the cells within the TA identified by TAC#2 support slice #1 and slice #2. If the requested NSSAI of the terminal device includes slice #1 and slice #2, the core network device may send a registration accept message to the terminal device (carrying: Allowed NSSAI = slice #1, Partially Allowed NSSAI = slice #2 (supported by the TA identified by TAC#2), RA = {TAC#1, TAC#2}; or, carrying: Allowed NSSAI = slice #1, Partially Rejected NSSAI = slice #2 can be supported by the TA identified by TAC#2/cannot be supported by the TA identified by TAC#1), RA = {TAC#1, TAC#2}). Obviously, the RA of the terminal device includes the TA identified by TAC#1 and the TA identified by TAC#2; slice #2 can be supported by the TA identified by TAC#2/cannot be supported by the TA identified by TAC#1. In this way, when the terminal device moves within the current RA, for example, when it moves to the TA identified by TAC#2, it can initiate a registration request for slice #2 again.

在一些设计中,终端设备在能够支持部分允许NSSAI(或部分拒绝NSSAI)的TA(包括源基站对应的小区)中建立与部分允许NSSAI(或部分拒绝NSSAI)关联的会话;然后,终端设备从源基站移动至目标基站,目标基站对应的小区位于不能支持部分允许NSSAI(或部分拒绝NSSAI)的TA中,那么原先已经建立了的会话将无法被支持,因此该会话的用户面资源应该被去激活,即目标基站可以将该会话拒绝准入或者去激活/挂起。In some designs, a terminal device establishes a session associated with partially allowed NSSAI (or partially rejected NSSAI) in a TA (including the cell corresponding to the source base station) that can support partially allowed NSSAI (or partially rejected NSSAI); then, the terminal device moves from the source base station to the target base station, and the cell corresponding to the target base station is located in a TA that cannot support partially allowed NSSAI (or partially rejected NSSAI), then the previously established session will not be supported, and therefore the user plane resources of the session should be deactivated, that is, the target base station can deny access to the session or deactivate/suspend it.

方式C:Method C:

假设终端设备当前所在的小区可以支持切片#1和切片#2对应的服务,切片#1在终端设备的RA内属于允许NSSAI,当切片#2的资源(例如会话资源)在核心网侧发生拥塞或者不可用时,为了保证终端设备的业务的连续性,可能执行网络切片替换(network slice replacement)的流程,即建立与切片#1(即替代S-NSSAI)相关联的会话,并通过该会话来提供切片#2(即原始S-NSSAI)对应的服务,也就是说,会话的原始S-NSSAI与替换S-NSSAI不一致。Assume that the cell where the terminal device is currently located can support the services corresponding to slice #1 and slice #2, and slice #1 is allowed NSSAI in the RA of the terminal device. When the resources of slice #2 (such as session resources) are congested or unavailable on the core network side, in order to ensure the continuity of the service of the terminal device, the network slice replacement process may be executed, that is, a session associated with slice #1 (that is, the replacement S-NSSAI) is established, and the service corresponding to slice #2 (that is, the original S-NSSAI) is provided through the session. In other words, the original S-NSSAI of the session is inconsistent with the replacement S-NSSAI.

具体来说,核心网设备向终端设备发送原始S-NSSAI与替换S-NSSAI之间的映射(mapping)关系。其中,核心网设备向终端设备发送前述mapping关系的时间不被限制(不一定需要依赖于建立原始S-NSSAI的会话来触发)。可选的,如果终端设备的允许NSSAI和/或配置NSSAI不包括替换S-NSSAI,核心网设备还可以将替换S-NSSAI加入终端设备的允许NSSAI和/或配置NSSAI。Specifically, the core network device sends a mapping relationship between the original S-NSSAI and the replacement S-NSSAI to the terminal device. The time for the core network device to send the aforementioned mapping relationship to the terminal device is not limited (it does not necessarily need to rely on the session to establish the original S-NSSAI to trigger). Optionally, if the allowed NSSAI and/or configured NSSAI of the terminal device does not include the replacement S-NSSAI, the core network device can also add the replacement S-NSSAI to the allowed NSSAI and/or configured NSSAI of the terminal device.

终端设备在接收到前述mapping关系后,可以发起基于原始S-NSSAI的会话;在发起会话的过程中,需要在会话的建立请求中携带原始S-NSSAI和替换S-NSSAI。核心网设备中的AMF网元在收到该会话的建立请求后,可以将上述两个S-NSSAI都发给SMF网元;SMF网元可以确定建立与替换S-NSSAI关联的会话。即完成了网络切片替换过程。After receiving the aforementioned mapping relationship, the terminal device can initiate a session based on the original S-NSSAI; in the process of initiating the session, it is necessary to carry the original S-NSSAI and the replacement S-NSSAI in the session establishment request. After receiving the session establishment request, the AMF network element in the core network device can send both of the above two S-NSSAIs to the SMF network element; the SMF network element can determine to establish a session associated with the replacement S-NSSAI. That is, the network slice replacement process is completed.

基于前述情景示例,如果将方式B和方式C中的通信方式结合起来,在终端设备从源小区(即源基站管理的当前服务小区)移动到目标小区(即目标基站管理的目标服务小区),并针对终端设备的会话迁移(即会话切换)过程中,可能会出现以下情况:当目标小区能够提供替换S-NSSAI对应的服务但是无法提供原始S-NSSAI对应的服务时,目标小区的管理设备无法明确如何对会话进行会话迁移处理。本申请中会话迁移即为会话切换,会话迁移过程即为会话切换过程,会话迁移处理即为会话切换处理。Based on the above scenario example, if the communication methods in method B and method C are combined, when the terminal device moves from the source cell (i.e., the current service cell managed by the source base station) to the target cell (i.e., the target service cell managed by the target base station), and during the session migration (i.e., session switching) of the terminal device, the following situation may occur: When the target cell can provide the service corresponding to the replacement S-NSSAI but cannot provide the service corresponding to the original S-NSSAI, the management device of the target cell cannot clearly know how to perform session migration processing on the session. In this application, session migration is session switching, the session migration process is the session switching process, and the session migration processing is the session switching processing.

例如,如图4所示,终端设备的RA={TAC#1,TAC#2},TAC#1标识的TA内的小区支持切片#1,TAC#2标识的TA内的小区支持切片#1和切片#2。终端设备在RA内的Allowed NSSAI=切片#1,终端设备在RA内的Partially Allowed NSSAI=切片#2(或者Partially Rejected NSSAI=切片#2),终端设备从核心网设备接收并保存切片#1(替换S-NSSAI)和切片#2(原始S-NSSAI)的mapping关系。 For example, as shown in Figure 4, the RA of the terminal device = {TAC#1, TAC#2}, the cells in the TA identified by TAC#1 support slice #1, and the cells in the TA identified by TAC#2 support slice #1 and slice #2. The Allowed NSSAI of the terminal device in the RA = slice #1, the Partially Allowed NSSAI of the terminal device in the RA = slice #2 (or Partially Rejected NSSAI = slice #2), and the terminal device receives and saves the mapping relationship between slice #1 (replacing S-NSSAI) and slice #2 (original S-NSSAI) from the core network device.

在一些设计中,当终端设备位于TAC#2标识的TA内(包括源小区)时,终端设备可以请求建立替代S-NSSAI为切片#1且原始S-NSSAI为切片#2的会话;核心网设备完成网络切片替换过程后,向源小区指示建立关联切片#1的会话。伴随着终端设备的移动,当终端设备位于TAC#1标识的TA内(包括目标小区)时,源基站需要与目标基站之间进行已建立的会话的迁移。In some designs, when the terminal device is located in the TA identified by TAC#2 (including the source cell), the terminal device can request to establish a session with the replacement S-NSSAI as slice #1 and the original S-NSSAI as slice #2; after the core network device completes the network slice replacement process, it instructs the source cell to establish a session associated with slice #1. With the movement of the terminal device, when the terminal device is located in the TA identified by TAC#1 (including the target cell), the source base station needs to migrate the established session with the target base station.

在传统技术中,目标基站在接收到会话的切换请求时,可以获取与该会话关联的网络切片(即替换S-NSSAI);相应的,目标基站可能会判断自身所属的TA是否支持该替换S-NSSAI,从而确定是否对该会话进行准入处理。例如,在前述图4所示的示例中,与会话关联的网络切片为切片#1,目标基站处于TAC#1标识的TA内,且TAC#1标识的TA能够支持切片#1,因此目标基站可以对该会话进行准入处理。然而,由于该会话实际提供的是切片#2对应的服务,目标基站所在TA不能支持切片#2,因此目标基站如果基于切片#2对该会话进行准入处理,应该将该会话拒绝准入或者去激活/挂起。在上述示例中,目标基站对于切换过程中会话的迁移处理并不明确,从而导致目标基站无法实现针对网络切片进行标准化的准入控制,会话切换的准确性较低。In traditional technology, when the target base station receives a handover request for a session, it can obtain the network slice associated with the session (i.e., replace the S-NSSAI); accordingly, the target base station may determine whether the TA to which it belongs supports the replacement S-NSSAI, thereby determining whether to perform admission processing on the session. For example, in the example shown in Figure 4 above, the network slice associated with the session is slice #1, the target base station is in the TA identified by TAC #1, and the TA identified by TAC #1 can support slice #1, so the target base station can perform admission processing on the session. However, since the session actually provides the service corresponding to slice #2, the TA where the target base station is located cannot support slice #2. Therefore, if the target base station performs admission processing on the session based on slice #2, the session should be denied admission or deactivated/suspended. In the above example, the target base station is not clear about the migration processing of the session during the handover process, which results in the target base station being unable to implement standardized admission control for network slices, and the accuracy of session switching is low.

为了提高会话切换的准确性,提高通信效率,本申请实施例提供了一种通信方法,该方法可以在前述图1所示的通信系统中实现。In order to improve the accuracy of session switching and improve communication efficiency, an embodiment of the present application provides a communication method, which can be implemented in the communication system shown in the aforementioned FIG. 1 .

图5为本申请实施例提供的一种通信方法的示意图,该方法包括如下步骤:FIG5 is a schematic diagram of a communication method provided in an embodiment of the present application, the method comprising the following steps:

S501:第二设备向第一设备发送的切换请求,该切换请求用于请求将第一会话切换至第一设备;第一会话关联的网络切片为第一网络切片,且第一会话用于为终端设备提供第二网络切片对应的服务;第一设备为第一小区的管理设备,第一小区支持的网络切片列表包括第一网络切片的标识。相应的,第一设备接收来自第二设备的切换请求;切换请求用于请求将第一会话切换至第一设备。S501: The second device sends a handover request to the first device, the handover request is used to request to handover the first session to the first device; the network slice associated with the first session is the first network slice, and the first session is used to provide the terminal device with services corresponding to the second network slice; the first device is a management device of the first cell, and the list of network slices supported by the first cell includes the identifier of the first network slice. Accordingly, the first device receives the handover request from the second device; the handover request is used to request to handover the first session to the first device.

可选的,切换请求可以承载于切换请求(handover request)信令中。Optionally, the handover request can be carried in the handover request signaling.

在图1中的通信系统中,接入网设备即为各个小区的管理设备。其中,第一设备可以是该通信系统中的任一个接入网设备。In the communication system in Figure 1, the access network device is the management device of each cell. The first device may be any access network device in the communication system.

在一种可能的设计中,假设终端设备当前所在的小区的管理设备为源基站,在执行步骤S501之前,如图6或图7所示,终端设备可以与源基站交互从而实现第一会话的建立流程,或者,源基站与上一个提供第一会话对应的业务的基站交互从而实现第一会话的切换流程,从而使得终端设备可以通过源基站实现第一会话相关的业务处理。结合图1所示的通信系统,该通信系统中的接入网设备包括源基站;终端设备还可以从核心网设备的AMF网元获取原始S-NSSAI(即第二网络切片)与替换S-NSSAI(即第一网络切片)之间的mapping关系。终端设备接入源基站后,当第二网络切片的资源在核心网侧发生拥塞或者不可用时,终端设备可以向AMF网元发送NAS消息,该NAS消息用于请求建立第一会话,该第一会话与第一网络切片相关联且提供第二网络切片对应的服务。AMF网元收到该NAS消息之后,向SMF网元发送第一网络切片的标识和第二网络切片的标识;当SMF网元根据前述两个网络切片的标识,确定建立第一会话时,AMF网元指示源基站准备第一会话相关的资源,从而实现第一会话的建立。可选的,AMF网元可以通过NGAP信令(例如PDU会话资源建立请求(PDU session resources setup request))来指示源基站。In one possible design, assuming that the management device of the cell where the terminal device is currently located is the source base station, before executing step S501, as shown in Figure 6 or Figure 7, the terminal device can interact with the source base station to implement the establishment process of the first session, or the source base station interacts with the previous base station that provides the service corresponding to the first session to implement the switching process of the first session, so that the terminal device can implement the service processing related to the first session through the source base station. In combination with the communication system shown in Figure 1, the access network device in the communication system includes a source base station; the terminal device can also obtain the mapping relationship between the original S-NSSAI (i.e., the second network slice) and the replacement S-NSSAI (i.e., the first network slice) from the AMF network element of the core network device. After the terminal device accesses the source base station, when the resources of the second network slice are congested or unavailable on the core network side, the terminal device can send a NAS message to the AMF network element, and the NAS message is used to request the establishment of a first session, which is associated with the first network slice and provides services corresponding to the second network slice. After receiving the NAS message, the AMF network element sends the identifier of the first network slice and the identifier of the second network slice to the SMF network element; when the SMF network element determines to establish the first session based on the identifiers of the two network slices, the AMF network element instructs the source base station to prepare resources related to the first session, thereby establishing the first session. Optionally, the AMF network element can instruct the source base station through NGAP signaling (for example, PDU session resources setup request).

在一种可能的设计中,当终端设备移动位置并离开当前小区时,触发步骤S501的操作。In one possible design, when the terminal device moves and leaves the current cell, the operation of step S501 is triggered.

S502:当第一小区支持的网络切片列表不包括第二网络切片的标识时,第二设备向第一设备发送第一信息。第一信息用于指示对第一会话的处理方式为拒绝准入或者去激活。相应的,第一设备接收来自第二设备的第一信息。需要说明的是,本申请不限定步骤S501和步骤S502的执行顺序,即步骤S501和步骤S502可以同步执行,本申请不做限定。S502: When the list of network slices supported by the first cell does not include the identifier of the second network slice, the second device sends a first message to the first device. The first information is used to indicate that the processing method for the first session is to deny access or deactivate. Correspondingly, the first device receives the first information from the second device. It should be noted that this application does not limit the execution order of step S501 and step S502, that is, step S501 and step S502 can be executed simultaneously, and this application does not limit it.

可选的,该第一信息可以承载于handover request信令中。应理解,步骤S501中的切换请求和步骤S502中的第一信息可以携带于同一条handover request信令中,即第二设备可以向第一设备发送切换请求和第一信息。Optionally, the first information may be carried in a handover request signaling. It should be understood that the handover request in step S501 and the first information in step S502 may be carried in the same handover request signaling, that is, the second device may send the handover request and the first information to the first device.

在本申请实施例中,会话可以是PDU会话。PDU会话的状态可以是处于激活态(active)或非激活态(inactive)这两种稳定的状态。一般来说,建立成功的PDU会话处于激活态,释放成功的PDU会话处于非激活态。其中,非激活态也可称为去激活态。In an embodiment of the present application, a session may be a PDU session. The state of a PDU session may be in two stable states: active or inactive. Generally speaking, a successfully established PDU session is in an active state, and a successfully released PDU session is in an inactive state. The inactive state may also be referred to as a deactivated state.

可选的,本申请实施例中描述的“去激活”的处理方式,也可以替换为对会话进行“挂起”的处理方式,不影响本申请实施例中通信方法的实现。 Optionally, the "deactivation" processing method described in the embodiments of the present application can also be replaced by a "suspend" processing method for the session, which does not affect the implementation of the communication method in the embodiments of the present application.

可选的,第二设备向第一设备发送第一信息之前,还可以确定第二网络切片为允许在终端设备的注册区域中部分区域内使用的网络切片或者不允许在注册区域中部分区域内使用的网络切片。Optionally, before the second device sends the first information to the first device, it can also determine whether the second network slice is a network slice that is allowed to be used in a part of the registration area of the terminal device or a network slice that is not allowed to be used in a part of the registration area.

采用步骤S501和步骤S502的方法,在发生会话的网络切片替换(即第一网络切片与第二网络切片不同)后,在针对该会话的切换过程中,第一设备(即目标基站)能够基于该会话原始关联的切片(即第二网络切片)进行准入控制,提高会话切换的准确性,提高通信效率。By adopting the method of step S501 and step S502, after the network slice of a session is replaced (i.e., the first network slice is different from the second network slice), during the switching process for the session, the first device (i.e., the target base station) can perform access control based on the slice originally associated with the session (i.e., the second network slice), thereby improving the accuracy of session switching and improving communication efficiency.

在一种可能的设计中,第一设备可以根据第一信息,对第一会话进行拒绝准入或者去激活的操作。这样,第一信息直接指示对第一会话的处理方式,能够提高会话切换的准确性,提高通信效率。In a possible design, the first device may deny access to or deactivate the first session according to the first information. In this way, the first information directly indicates the processing method for the first session, which can improve the accuracy of session switching and improve communication efficiency.

可选的,前述第一信息可以包括第二网络切片的标识,当第一小区支持的网络切片列表不包括第二网络切片的标识时,第一设备对第一会话进行拒绝准入或者去激活的操作。这样,第一信息还可以间接指示对第一会话的处理方式,能够提高会话切换的准确性,提高通信效率。Optionally, the aforementioned first information may include an identifier of the second network slice. When the list of network slices supported by the first cell does not include the identifier of the second network slice, the first device denies access to or deactivates the first session. In this way, the first information can also indirectly indicate the processing method for the first session, which can improve the accuracy of session switching and improve communication efficiency.

可选的,前述第一信息还可以包括:至少一个第一类网络切片的标识或者至少一个第二类网络切片的标识;第一类网络切片为允许在终端设备的注册区域中部分区域内使用的网络切片,第二类网络切片为不允许在注册区域中部分区域内使用的网络切片。基于此,在第一设备对第一会话进行拒绝准入或者去激活的操作之前,第一设备还可以确定至少一个第一类网络切片的标识包括第二网络切片的标识;或者,第一设备还可以确定至少一个第二类网络切片的标识包括第二网络切片的标识。这样,第一设备可以进一步确定对第一会话的处理方式,从而可以提高会话切换的准确性,提高通信效率。Optionally, the aforementioned first information may also include: an identifier of at least one first-class network slice or an identifier of at least one second-class network slice; the first-class network slice is a network slice that is allowed to be used in part of the registration area of the terminal device, and the second-class network slice is a network slice that is not allowed to be used in part of the registration area. Based on this, before the first device denies access to or deactivates the first session, the first device may also determine that the identifier of at least one first-class network slice includes the identifier of the second network slice; or, the first device may also determine that the identifier of at least one second-class network slice includes the identifier of the second network slice. In this way, the first device can further determine how to handle the first session, thereby improving the accuracy of session switching and improving communication efficiency.

在本申请实施例中,接入网设备之间(例如基站与基站之间)的交互可以通过XnAP信令实现,核心网设备与接入网设备之间(例如AMF网元与基站之间)的交互可以通过NGAP信令实现,后文具体实施方式中的具体信令及信元均为示例,本申请不做限定。In an embodiment of the present application, the interaction between access network devices (for example, between base stations) can be achieved through XnAP signaling, and the interaction between core network devices and access network devices (for example, between AMF network elements and base stations) can be achieved through NGAP signaling. The specific signaling and signal elements in the specific implementation methods below are all examples and are not limited in this application.

基于图5所示的通信方法,在基于Xn的切换场景中,当终端设备从第二小区移动至第一小区时,前述步骤S501至步骤S502中的第二设备为第二小区的管理设备,第三设备为核心网设备。结合图1所示的通信系统,第二设备可以是该通信系统中的任一个接入网设备,且第二设备与第一设备不同;第三设备可以是该通信系统中的核心网设备。相应的,第一设备与第二设备之间的交互可以通过XnAP信令实现,第一设备与第三设备之间的交互可以通过NGAP信令实现,后文具体实施方式中的具体信令及信元均为示例,本申请不做限定。Based on the communication method shown in FIG5, in an Xn-based switching scenario, when the terminal device moves from the second cell to the first cell, the second device in the aforementioned steps S501 to S502 is the management device of the second cell, and the third device is the core network device. In conjunction with the communication system shown in FIG1, the second device can be any access network device in the communication system, and the second device is different from the first device; the third device can be a core network device in the communication system. Accordingly, the interaction between the first device and the second device can be achieved through XnAP signaling, and the interaction between the first device and the third device can be achieved through NGAP signaling. The specific signaling and information elements in the specific implementation methods below are examples, and this application does not limit them.

基于图5所示的通信方法,在基于Xn的切换场景下的一种可能的设计中,如图6所示,在执行步骤S502之前,第二设备还可以获取第二网络切片的标识,即获取会话的原始S-NSSAI。具体获取方式可以包括以下方式a和方式b。Based on the communication method shown in FIG5, in a possible design in a switching scenario based on Xn, as shown in FIG6, before executing step S502, the second device may also obtain the identifier of the second network slice, that is, obtain the original S-NSSAI of the session. The specific acquisition method may include the following method a and method b.

方式a:第二设备接收来自终端设备的第二信息;第二信息包括第二网络切片的标识;第二网络切片为允许在终端设备的注册区域中部分区域内使用的网络切片,或者,第二网络切片为不允许在注册区域中部分区域内使用的网络切片。Method a: The second device receives second information from the terminal device; the second information includes an identifier of a second network slice; the second network slice is a network slice that is allowed to be used in a part of the registration area of the terminal device, or the second network slice is a network slice that is not allowed to be used in a part of the registration area.

可选的,第二信息可以承载于RRC消息中。例如,在请求建立第一会话时,终端设备向AMF网元发送的RRC消息中携带NAS请求消息,NAS请求消息用于请求建立第一会话;该RRC消息还可以携带第一会话的原始S-NSSAI。应理解,终端设备在发送该RRC消息之前已经确定:该原始S-NSSAI(即第二网络切片)为允许在终端设备的注册区域中部分区域内使用的网络切片或者不允许在注册区域中部分区域内使用的网络切片。Optionally, the second information can be carried in an RRC message. For example, when requesting to establish a first session, the RRC message sent by the terminal device to the AMF network element carries a NAS request message, and the NAS request message is used to request to establish the first session; the RRC message can also carry the original S-NSSAI of the first session. It should be understood that before sending the RRC message, the terminal device has determined that the original S-NSSAI (i.e., the second network slice) is a network slice that is allowed to be used in part of the registration area of the terminal device or a network slice that is not allowed to be used in part of the registration area.

方式b:第二设备接收来自第三设备的第三信息;第三信息包括第二网络切片的标识,例如,第三信息包括:第一会话的原始S-NSSAI为第二网络切片;第三信息还可以包括至少一个第一类网络切片的标识和/或至少一个第二类网络切片列表的标识;第一类网络切片为允许在终端设备的注册区域中部分区域内使用的网络切片,第二类网络切片为不允许在注册区域中部分区域内使用的网络切片。Method b: The second device receives third information from the third device; the third information includes an identifier of the second network slice, for example, the third information includes: the original S-NSSAI of the first session is the second network slice; the third information may also include an identifier of at least one first-class network slice and/or an identifier of at least one second-class network slice list; the first-class network slice is a network slice that is allowed to be used in a part of the registration area of the terminal device, and the second-class network slice is a network slice that is not allowed to be used in a part of the registration area.

当采用方式b获取第二网络切片的标识时,第二设备还可以确定至少一个第一类网络切片的标识包括第二网络切片的标识;或者,第二设备确定至少一个第二类网络切片的标识包括第二网络切片的标识。When method b is used to obtain the identifier of the second network slice, the second device can also determine that the identifier of at least one first-type network slice includes the identifier of the second network slice; or, the second device determines that the identifier of at least one second-type network slice includes the identifier of the second network slice.

可选的,第三信息可以承载于NGAP信令(例如初始化上下文建立请求(initial context setup request)信令)中。Optionally, the third information may be carried in NGAP signaling (e.g., initial context setup request signaling).

基于图5所示的通信方法,在基于Xn的切换场景下的一种可能的设计中,在执行步骤S502之前,第二设备还可以获取第一小区支持的网络切片列表,即第一小区所在TA支持的网络切片列表。例如, 第二设备通过XnAP信令交互,获取该网络切片列表。进一步的,第二设备可以结合前述方式a获取到的第二信息或者前述方式b获取到的第三信息,以及第一小区支持的网络切片列表,确定第一小区支持的网络切片列表不包括第二网络切片的标识。Based on the communication method shown in FIG5 , in a possible design in a handover scenario based on Xn, before executing step S502, the second device may also obtain a list of network slices supported by the first cell, that is, a list of network slices supported by the TA where the first cell is located. The second device obtains the network slice list through XnAP signaling interaction. Further, the second device can combine the second information obtained by the aforementioned method a or the third information obtained by the aforementioned method b, and the network slice list supported by the first cell to determine that the network slice list supported by the first cell does not include the identifier of the second network slice.

基于图5所示的通信方法,在基于Xn的切换场景下的一种可能的设计中,如图6所示,前述步骤S502的后续操作包括以下方式一、方式二、方式三和方式四中的任一种方式。Based on the communication method shown in FIG5 , in a possible design based on an Xn-based switching scenario, as shown in FIG6 , the subsequent operation of the aforementioned step S502 includes any one of the following methods: method 1, method 2, method 3, and method 4.

方式一:第一设备根据第一信息,向第二设备发送第一消息;第一消息用于指示第一设备对第一会话的处理方式为拒绝准入或者去激活;第一设备向第三设备发送第二消息;第二消息用于指示第一会话的资源建立失败。相应的,第三设备接收来自第一设备的第二消息。其中,资源建立失败中指示的资源可以是第一会话对应的无线承载(例如,数据无线承载(data radio bearer,DRB))资源。Method 1: The first device sends a first message to the second device according to the first information; the first message is used to indicate that the first device handles the first session by denying access or deactivating; the first device sends a second message to the third device; the second message is used to indicate that the resource establishment of the first session failed. Correspondingly, the third device receives the second message from the first device. The resource indicated in the resource establishment failure may be a radio bearer (e.g., a data radio bearer (DRB)) resource corresponding to the first session.

可选的,第一设备接收来自第三设备的第一响应消息;第一响应消息用于指示释放第一会话的准入资源(例如DRB资源)。Optionally, the first device receives a first response message from the third device; the first response message is used to indicate the release of admission resources (eg, DRB resources) of the first session.

可选的,第一消息可以承载于XnAP信令,例如承载于切换请求确认(handover request acknowledge)信令中的PDU会话资源不被准入列表(PDU session resources not admitted list)信元中。第二消息可以承载于NGAP信令,例如路径切换请求(path switch request)信令的PDU会话资源建立失败列表(PDU session resource failed to setup list)信元中。第一响应消息承载于NGAP信令(例如路径切换请求确认(path switch request acknowledge)信令)中,该NGAP信令用于通知第一设备用户面路径已经被成功切换的会话和/或用户面路径切换失败需要被释放准入资源的会话。Optionally, the first message may be carried in XnAP signaling, for example, in a PDU session resources not admitted list (PDU session resources not admitted list) cell in a handover request acknowledgment signaling. The second message may be carried in NGAP signaling, for example, in a PDU session resource failed to setup list (PDU session resource failed to setup list) cell in a path switch request (path switch request) signaling. The first response message is carried in NGAP signaling (for example, a path switch request acknowledgment signaling), which is used to notify the first device of sessions whose user plane paths have been successfully switched and/or sessions whose user plane path switching fails and whose admission resources need to be released.

采用方式一,即使第一小区能够支持第一会话关联的第一网络切片,第一设备也会根据第一信息在向第二设备回复的XnAP信令中指示(例如通过第一消息指示)第一会话被拒绝准入或者去激活;由于第一会话的处理方式为拒绝准入或者去激活,因此,第一设备可以不建立第一会话的准入资源,并向第三设备发送用于指示第一会话的资源建立失败的消息(第二消息)。Using method 1, even if the first cell can support the first network slice associated with the first session, the first device will indicate in the XnAP signaling replied to the second device according to the first information (for example, through a first message indication) that the first session is denied access or deactivated; since the first session is processed by denying access or deactivation, the first device may not establish access resources for the first session, and send a message (second message) to the third device to indicate that resource establishment for the first session failed.

方式二:第一设备向第二设备发送第三消息;第三消息用于指示第一设备对第一会话的处理方式为允许准入;第一设备根据第一信息,向第三设备发送第四消息;第四消息用于指示第一会话的资源建立失败。相应的,第三设备接收来自第一设备的第四消息。其中,资源建立失败中指示的资源可以是第一会话对应的无线承载(例如DRB)资源。Mode 2: The first device sends a third message to the second device; the third message is used to indicate that the first device handles the first session as allowing access; the first device sends a fourth message to the third device based on the first information; the fourth message is used to indicate that the resource establishment of the first session failed. Correspondingly, the third device receives the fourth message from the first device. The resource indicated in the resource establishment failure may be a radio bearer (e.g., DRB) resource corresponding to the first session.

可选的,第一设备接收来自第三设备的第一响应消息;第一响应消息用于指示释放第一会话的准入资源(例如DRB资源)。Optionally, the first device receives a first response message from the third device; the first response message is used to indicate the release of admission resources (eg, DRB resources) of the first session.

可选的,第三消息可以承载于handover request acknowledge信令中的PDU session resources admitted list信元中。第四消息可以承载于path switch request信令的PDU session resource failed to setup list信元中。第一响应消息承载于NGAP信令(例如path switch request acknowledge信令)中,该NGAP信令用于通知第一设备已经被成功切换的用户面路径对应的会话。Optionally, the third message may be carried in the PDU session resources admitted list cell in the handover request acknowledge signaling. The fourth message may be carried in the PDU session resource failed to setup list cell of the path switch request signaling. The first response message is carried in NGAP signaling (e.g., path switch request acknowledge signaling), which is used to notify the first device of the session corresponding to the user plane path that has been successfully switched.

采用方式二,第一设备在向第二设备回复的XnAP信令(第三消息)中指示第一会话被允许准入;此外,第一设备可以根据第一信息的指示,不建立第一会话的准入资源,并向第三会话发送用于指示第一会话的资源建立失败的消息(第四消息),也可以最终实现第一会话的拒绝准入或去激活。Using method 2, the first device indicates in the XnAP signaling (third message) replied to the second device that the first session is allowed access; in addition, the first device may not establish access resources for the first session according to the instructions of the first information, and send a message (fourth message) to the third session to indicate that the resource establishment of the first session failed, which can also ultimately achieve the denial of access or deactivation of the first session.

方式三:第一设备根据第一信息,将第一会话进行去激活的处理,或者忽略针对第一会话的处理需求,不会建立准入资源(例如DRB资源);相应的,第一设备在后续向第二设备发送的切换请求相关的消息(包括handover request acknowledge信令)中不携带与第一会话相关的信息。第一设备在后续向第三设备发送的切换请求相关的消息(包括path switch request信令)中也不携带与第一会话相关的信息。例如,第一设备向第二设备发送的handover request acknowledge信令中包括PDU session resources not admitted list信元和PDU session resources admitted list信元,但是前述PDU session resources not admitted list信元和PDU session resources admitted list信元中均不包括第一会话的标识。又如,第一设备向第三设备发送的path switch request信令中包括PDU会话资源切换列表(PDU session resource switched list)和PDU session resource failed to setup list,但是前述PDU session resource switched list和前述PDU session resource failed to setup list中均不包括第一会话的标识。此外,第一设备可以向第二设备发送第一消息(参考方式一);或者,第一设备还可以向第二设备发送第三消息(参考方式二)。Method three: The first device deactivates the first session according to the first information, or ignores the processing requirements for the first session, and does not establish access resources (such as DRB resources); accordingly, the first device does not carry information related to the first session in the subsequent handover request-related messages (including handover request acknowledgment signaling) sent to the second device. The first device also does not carry information related to the first session in the subsequent handover request-related messages (including path switch request signaling) sent to the third device. For example, the handover request acknowledgment signaling sent by the first device to the second device includes a PDU session resources not admitted list element and a PDU session resources admitted list element, but the aforementioned PDU session resources not admitted list element and PDU session resources admitted list element do not include the identifier of the first session. For another example, the path switch request signaling sent by the first device to the third device includes a PDU session resource switching list (PDU session resource switched list) and a PDU session resource failed to setup list, but the aforementioned PDU session resource switched list and the aforementioned PDU session resource failed to setup list do not include an identifier of the first session. In addition, the first device may send a first message to the second device (reference method one); or, the first device may also send a third message to the second device (reference method two).

采用方式三,第一设备在接收到第一信息之后,不去处理第一会话的后续任何操作,以此作为拒绝准入的一种实现方式,从而中断第一会话的切换流程。In the third approach, after receiving the first information, the first device does not process any subsequent operations of the first session, as an implementation approach of denying access, thereby interrupting the switching process of the first session.

方式四:第一设备还可以向第二设备发送第三消息;第三消息用于指示第一设备对第一会话的处理 方式为允许准入。第一设备还可以向第三设备发送第八消息;第八消息用于指示第一会话的资源建立成功;相应的,第三设备接收来自第一设备的第八消息。当第一小区支持的网络切片列表不包括第二网络切片的标识时,第三设备还可以向第一设备发送第二响应消息,第二响应消息用于指示释放第一会话的准入资源;相应的,第一设备接收来自第三设备的第二响应消息。Mode 4: The first device may also send a third message to the second device; the third message is used to instruct the first device to process the first session The method is to allow access. The first device may also send an eighth message to the third device; the eighth message is used to indicate that the resources of the first session are successfully established; accordingly, the third device receives the eighth message from the first device. When the list of network slices supported by the first cell does not include the identifier of the second network slice, the third device may also send a second response message to the first device, and the second response message is used to indicate the release of the access resources of the first session; accordingly, the first device receives the second response message from the third device.

可选的,在方式四的具体实现过程中,第三设备在确定向第一设备发送第二响应消息之前,第三设备还可以针对第一会话实际提供服务的网络切片(即第二网络切片)与第一小区支持的网络切片列表进行判断,该判断过程可以参考本申请后续步骤S801至步骤S802中所示的第五设备(即核心网设备)执行的动作,此处不再赘述。该判断过程可以包括:第三设备确定第二网络切片为允许在终端设备的注册区域中部分区域内使用的网络切片;或者,第三设备确定第二网络切片为不允许在注册区域中部分区域内使用的网络切片。Optionally, in the specific implementation process of method 4, before the third device determines to send a second response message to the first device, the third device may also make a judgment on the network slice (i.e., the second network slice) actually providing services for the first session and the list of network slices supported by the first cell. The judgment process may refer to the actions performed by the fifth device (i.e., the core network device) shown in subsequent steps S801 to S802 of this application, which will not be repeated here. The judgment process may include: the third device determines that the second network slice is a network slice that is allowed to be used in part of the registration area of the terminal device; or the third device determines that the second network slice is a network slice that is not allowed to be used in part of the registration area.

这样,在方式四中,即使第一设备对第一会话的处理方式设置为允许准入,并建立第一会话的准入资源,第一设备也可能会接收到来自第三设备的用于释放第一会话的准入资源的指示,从而中断第一会话的切换流程。Thus, in method four, even if the first device sets the processing mode for the first session to allow access and establishes access resources for the first session, the first device may receive an instruction from the third device to release the access resources for the first session, thereby interrupting the switching process of the first session.

基于图5所示的通信方法,在基于NG的切换场景中,前述步骤S501至步骤S502中的第二设备为核心网设备。相应的,第一设备与第二设备之间的交互可以通过NGAP信令实现,后文具体实施方式中的具体信令及信元均为示例,本申请不做限定。Based on the communication method shown in Figure 5, in the NG-based handover scenario, the second device in the aforementioned steps S501 to S502 is a core network device. Accordingly, the interaction between the first device and the second device can be implemented through NGAP signaling, and the specific signaling and information elements in the following specific implementation methods are all examples, and this application does not limit them.

基于图5所示的通信方法,在基于NG的切换场景下的一种可能的设计中,在执行步骤S501之前,第二设备还可以接收来自源基站的切换请求;在执行步骤S502之前,第二设备还可以确定第二网络切片为允许在终端设备的注册区域中部分区域内使用的网络切片;或者,第二设备还可以确定第二网络切片为不允许在注册区域中部分区域内使用的网络切片。Based on the communication method shown in Figure 5, in a possible design based on NG switching scenario, before executing step S501, the second device may also receive a switching request from the source base station; before executing step S502, the second device may also determine that the second network slice is a network slice that is allowed to be used in a part of the registration area of the terminal device; or, the second device may also determine that the second network slice is a network slice that is not allowed to be used in a part of the registration area.

基于图5所示的通信方法,在基于NG的切换场景下的一种可能的设计中,如图7所示,前述步骤S502的后续操作包括以下方式1和方式2。Based on the communication method shown in FIG. 5 , in a possible design based on an NG switching scenario, as shown in FIG. 7 , the subsequent operations of the aforementioned step S502 include the following method 1 and method 2.

方式1:第一设备根据第一信息,向第二设备发送第五消息;第五消息用于指示第一设备对第一会话的处理方式为拒绝准入或者去激活。Mode 1: The first device sends a fifth message to the second device according to the first information; the fifth message is used to indicate that the first device handles the first session by denying access or deactivating the session.

可选的,第五消息可以承载于handover request acknowledge信令中的PDU session resource failed to setup list信元中。Optionally, the fifth message can be carried in the PDU session resource failed to setup list element in the handover request acknowledgement signaling.

方式2:第一设备向第二设备发送第六消息;第六消息用于指示第一设备对第一会话的处理方式为允许准入。Mode 2: The first device sends a sixth message to the second device; the sixth message is used to indicate that the first device should allow access to the first session.

可选的,第六消息可以承载于handover request acknowledge信令中的PDU session resources admitted list信元中。Optionally, the sixth message can be carried in the PDU session resources admitted list element in the handover request acknowledgment signaling.

在方式2的具体实现过程中,第一设备虽然在向第二设备回复的NGAP信令(第六消息)中指示第一会话被允许准入;此外,第一设备可以根据第一信息的指示,不建立第一会话的准入资源(例如DRB资源),事实上也可以实现第一会话的拒绝准入或去激活。In the specific implementation process of method 2, although the first device indicates in the NGAP signaling (sixth message) replied to the second device that the first session is allowed to be admitted; in addition, the first device may not establish the admission resources (such as DRB resources) of the first session according to the instructions of the first information, and in fact may also realize the refusal of admission or deactivation of the first session.

基于图5所示的通信方法,在基于NG的切换场景下的一种可能的设计中,当终端设备从第三小区移动至第一小区时,第四设备为第三小区的管理设备。其中,第四设备可以是图1所示的通信系统中的任一个接入网设备,且第四设备与第一设备不同。相应的,第一设备与第四设备之间的交互可以通过XnAP信令实现,后文具体实施方式中的具体信令及信元均为示例,本申请不做限定。Based on the communication method shown in FIG5 , in a possible design based on the NG handover scenario, when the terminal device moves from the third cell to the first cell, the fourth device is the management device of the third cell. The fourth device can be any access network device in the communication system shown in FIG1 , and the fourth device is different from the first device. Accordingly, the interaction between the first device and the fourth device can be implemented through XnAP signaling, and the specific signaling and information elements in the specific implementation methods below are examples, and this application does not limit them.

可选的,在执行步骤S501之前,第二设备还可以接收来自第四设备的切换请求(包括第一会话的切换请求);在执行步骤S502之后,第二设备还可以向第四设备发送第三响应消息,该第三响应消息用于通知第四设备需要被释放的会话(包括第一会话)。其中,第三响应消息可以承载于切换命令(handover command)中。可选的,第二设备还可以将第一会话去激活。Optionally, before executing step S501, the second device may also receive a handover request (including a handover request of the first session) from the fourth device; after executing step S502, the second device may also send a third response message to the fourth device, the third response message being used to notify the fourth device of the session (including the first session) that needs to be released. The third response message may be carried in a handover command. Optionally, the second device may also deactivate the first session.

可选的,在第二设备向第四设备发送第三响应消息之前,第二设备还可以针对第一会话的网络切片与第一设备的网络切片列表进行判断,该判断过程可以参考本申请后续步骤S801至步骤S802中所示的第五设备(即核心网设备)执行的动作,此处不再赘述。该判断过程可以包括:第二设备确定第二网络切片为允许在终端设备的注册区域中部分区域内使用的网络切片;或者,第二设备确定第二网络切片为不允许在注册区域中部分区域内使用的网络切片。Optionally, before the second device sends the third response message to the fourth device, the second device may also make a judgment on the network slice of the first session and the network slice list of the first device. The judgment process may refer to the actions performed by the fifth device (i.e., the core network device) shown in subsequent steps S801 to S802 of this application, which will not be repeated here. The judgment process may include: the second device determines that the second network slice is a network slice that is allowed to be used in a part of the registration area of the terminal device; or the second device determines that the second network slice is a network slice that is not allowed to be used in a part of the registration area.

可选的,第二设备还可以接收来自第四设备的第一信息。也就是说,在第四设备确定第一信息之后, 第四设备可以通过第二设备(例如核心网设备中的AMF网元)将第一信息透传给第一设备。可选的,如果第一信息是通过前述透传的方式发送的,则第二设备无需对第一信息进行解析。Optionally, the second device may also receive the first information from the fourth device. That is, after the fourth device determines the first information, The fourth device may transparently transmit the first information to the first device through the second device (eg, the AMF network element in the core network device). Optionally, if the first information is sent by the aforementioned transparent transmission method, the second device does not need to parse the first information.

图8为本申请实施例提供的另一种通信方法的示意图,该方法包括如下步骤:FIG8 is a schematic diagram of another communication method provided in an embodiment of the present application, the method comprising the following steps:

S801:第五设备接收切换请求,切换请求用于请求将第二会话切换至第六设备;第二会话关联的网络切片为第一网络切片,且第二会话用于为终端设备提供第二网络切片对应的服务;第五设备为核心网设备;第六设备是第一小区的管理设备,第一小区支持的网络切片列表包括第一网络切片的标识。S801: The fifth device receives a switching request, where the switching request is used to request that the second session be switched to the sixth device; the network slice associated with the second session is the first network slice, and the second session is used to provide the terminal device with services corresponding to the second network slice; the fifth device is a core network device; the sixth device is a management device of the first cell, and the list of network slices supported by the first cell includes the identifier of the first network slice.

可选的,切换请求可以承载于handover request信令中。Optionally, the handover request can be carried in the handover request signaling.

在图1中的通信系统中,接入网设备即为各个小区的管理设备。其中,第六设备可以是该通信系统中的任一个接入网设备。In the communication system in Figure 1, the access network device is the management device of each cell. The sixth device may be any access network device in the communication system.

在一种可能的设计中,假设终端设备当前所在的小区的管理设备为源基站,第六设备为目标基站,在执行步骤S801之前,终端设备可以与源基站交互,通过第二会话的建立流程或切换流程,从而使得终端设备通过源基站实现第二会话相关的业务处理。该设计的具体实现可以参考步骤S501中的描述,此处不再赘述。In a possible design, assuming that the management device of the cell where the terminal device is currently located is the source base station, and the sixth device is the target base station, before executing step S801, the terminal device can interact with the source base station, through the establishment process or switching process of the second session, so that the terminal device implements the service processing related to the second session through the source base station. The specific implementation of this design can refer to the description in step S501, which will not be repeated here.

在一种可能的设计中,当终端设备移动位置并离开当前小区时,触发步骤S801的操作。In one possible design, when the terminal device moves and leaves the current cell, the operation of step S801 is triggered.

S802:当第一小区支持的网络切片列表不包括第二网络切片的标识时,第五设备将第二会话去激活。S802: When the list of network slices supported by the first cell does not include the identifier of the second network slice, the fifth device deactivates the second session.

可选的,在第五设备对第二会话进行去激活处理之前,第五设备还可以确定第二网络切片为允许在终端设备的注册区域中部分区域内使用的网络切片;或者,第五设备还可以确定第二网络切片为不允许在注册区域中部分区域内使用的网络切片。Optionally, before the fifth device deactivates the second session, the fifth device may also determine that the second network slice is a network slice that is allowed to be used in a part of the registration area of the terminal device; or, the fifth device may also determine that the second network slice is a network slice that is not allowed to be used in a part of the registration area.

基于图8所示的通信方法,在基于Xn的切换场景中,第五设备为核心网设备,第六设备为目标基站。相应的,第五设备与源基站之间的交互可以通过XnAP信令实现,第五设备与第六设备之间的交互可以通过NGAP信令实现,后文具体实施方式中的具体信令及信元均为示例,本申请不做限定。Based on the communication method shown in FIG8 , in the Xn-based handover scenario, the fifth device is a core network device, and the sixth device is a target base station. Accordingly, the interaction between the fifth device and the source base station can be implemented through XnAP signaling, and the interaction between the fifth device and the sixth device can be implemented through NGAP signaling. The specific signaling and information elements in the following specific implementation methods are examples, and this application does not limit them.

基于图8所示的通信方法,在基于Xn的切换场景下的一种可能的设计中,如图9所示,在步骤S801之前,源基站向第六设备发送第二会话的切换请求,第六设备针对第二会话进行允许准入的处理,例如第六设备建立第二会话对应的无线承载(例如DRB)资源。相应的,第六设备可以向源基站发送第四响应消息,该第四响应消息用于指示第六设备对第二会话的预处理方式为允许准入。其中,第四响应消息可以承载于handover request acknowledge信令中的PDU session resources admitted list信元中。Based on the communication method shown in FIG8 , in a possible design under the Xn-based handover scenario, as shown in FIG9 , before step S801, the source base station sends a handover request for the second session to the sixth device, and the sixth device performs access permission processing for the second session, for example, the sixth device establishes a radio bearer (e.g., DRB) resource corresponding to the second session. Correspondingly, the sixth device may send a fourth response message to the source base station, and the fourth response message is used to indicate that the sixth device pre-processes the second session in a manner that allows access. The fourth response message may be carried in the PDU session resources admitted list element in the handover request acknowledgment signaling.

可选的,第六设备还可以向第五设备发送切换请求。第六设备还可以向第五设备发送第七消息;第七消息用于指示第六设备对第二会话的预处理方式为允许准入。相应的,第五设备可以接收来自第六设备的第七消息。Optionally, the sixth device may also send a switching request to the fifth device. The sixth device may also send a seventh message to the fifth device; the seventh message is used to indicate that the pre-processing mode of the sixth device for the second session is to allow access. Correspondingly, the fifth device may receive the seventh message from the sixth device.

可选的,第七消息可以承载于path switch request信令中的在下行链路中待切换的PDU会话资源的列表(PDU session resource to be switched in downlink list)信元中。Optionally, the seventh message may be carried in the PDU session resource to be switched in downlink list (PDU session resource to be switched in downlink list) element in the path switch request signaling.

基于该设计,当第一小区支持的网络切片列表不包括第二网络切片的标识时,第五设备可以响应于第七消息将第二会话去激活。这样,即使第五设备收到第六设备对第二会话的预处理方式为允许准入,第五设备也可以根据网络切片列表确定对第二会话进行去激活,从而可以提高会话切换的准确性,提高通信效率。Based on this design, when the list of network slices supported by the first cell does not include the identifier of the second network slice, the fifth device can deactivate the second session in response to the seventh message. In this way, even if the fifth device receives the pre-processing method of the sixth device for the second session as allowing access, the fifth device can determine to deactivate the second session according to the network slice list, thereby improving the accuracy of session switching and improving communication efficiency.

在执行步骤S802之后的一种可能的设计中,第五设备还可以向第六设备发送第四信息;第四信息用于指示释放第二会话的准入资源。In a possible design after executing step S802, the fifth device may also send fourth information to the sixth device; the fourth information is used to indicate the release of admission resources for the second session.

可选的,第四信息可以承载于path switch request acknowledge信令中的PDU会话资源释放列表(PDU session resource released list)信元。Optionally, the fourth information can be carried in the PDU session resource released list (PDU session resource released list) element in the path switch request acknowledgement signaling.

基于图8所示的通信方法,在基于NG的切换场景下的一种可能的设计中,如图10所示,在步骤S801之前,第七设备还可以向第五设备发送一个或多个会话(包括第二会话)的切换请求;该切换请求用于请求将前述一个或多个会话(包括第二会话)从第七设备切换至第六设备。第七设备可以是源基站,即终端设备当前所处小区的管理设备。相应的,第五设备与第六设备之间的交互可以通过NGAP信令实现,第五设备与第七设备之间的交互可以通过NGAP信令实现,后文具体实施方式中的具体信 令及信元均为示例,本申请不做限定。Based on the communication method shown in FIG8 , in a possible design based on the NG switching scenario, as shown in FIG10 , before step S801, the seventh device may also send a switching request for one or more sessions (including the second session) to the fifth device; the switching request is used to request that the aforementioned one or more sessions (including the second session) be switched from the seventh device to the sixth device. The seventh device may be a source base station, that is, a management device of the cell where the terminal device is currently located. Accordingly, the interaction between the fifth device and the sixth device may be implemented through NGAP signaling, and the interaction between the fifth device and the seventh device may be implemented through NGAP signaling. The specific signaling in the specific implementation manner described below will be described. The commands and information elements are examples and are not limited in this application.

基于图8所示的通信方法,在基于NG的切换场景下的一种可能的设计中,在步骤S802之后,第五设备还可以向第六设备发送一个或多个会话(不包括第二会话)的切换请求,该一个或多个会话(不包括第二会话)为第七设备成功建立的会话。其中,该切换请求可以承载于handover request信令,上述一个或多个会话的切换请求可以承载于handover request信令中的PDU会话资源建立列表(PDU session resource setup list)信元中。Based on the communication method shown in FIG8 , in a possible design under the NG-based handover scenario, after step S802, the fifth device may also send a handover request for one or more sessions (excluding the second session) to the sixth device, and the one or more sessions (excluding the second session) are sessions successfully established by the seventh device. The handover request may be carried in a handover request signaling, and the handover request for the one or more sessions may be carried in a PDU session resource setup list (PDU session resource setup list) cell in the handover request signaling.

可选的,第六设备还可以向第五设备发送第五响应消息;该第五响应消息用于通知第五设备资源建立成功的会话或者资源建立失败的会话,第五响应消息不包括第二会话。其中,该第五响应消息承载于handover request acknowledge信令中。Optionally, the sixth device may also send a fifth response message to the fifth device; the fifth response message is used to notify the fifth device of a successful session or a failed session of resource establishment, and the fifth response message does not include the second session. The fifth response message is carried in the handover request acknowledgement signaling.

可选的,第五设备还可以向第七设备发送第六响应消息;该第六响应消息用于通知第七设备前述一个或多个会话中已经被成功切换的用户面路径对应的会话(不包括第二会话)或者需要被释放的会话(包括第二会话)。其中,该第六响应消息承载于handover command信令中。Optionally, the fifth device may also send a sixth response message to the seventh device; the sixth response message is used to notify the seventh device of the session corresponding to the user plane path that has been successfully switched among the one or more sessions mentioned above (excluding the second session) or the session that needs to be released (including the second session). The sixth response message is carried in the handover command signaling.

图11是本申请实施例提供的一种通信方法的示例图,该方法示出了图5和图8所示通信方法的部分实现方式,应用于如图4所示的情景下的基于Xn的切换场景中。该方法可应用于图1所示的通信系统中,在该示例中,前述接入网设备包括源基站(用S-gNB表示)和目标基站(用T-gNB表示),终端设备(用UE表示),前述核心网设备的功能由AMF网元和SMF网元实现。FIG11 is an example diagram of a communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application, which shows a partial implementation of the communication method shown in FIG5 and FIG8, and is applied to the Xn-based switching scenario in the scenario shown in FIG4. The method can be applied to the communication system shown in FIG1. In this example, the aforementioned access network device includes a source base station (represented by S-gNB) and a target base station (represented by T-gNB), a terminal device (represented by UE), and the functions of the aforementioned core network device are implemented by AMF network elements and SMF network elements.

步骤1:建立PDU Session#1。Step 1: Establish PDU Session #1.

UE接入S-gNB后,UE向AMF网元发送NAS消息,该NAS消息用于请求建立关于切片#2的PDU会话;由于UE收到了切片#1和切片#2的mapping关系,因此,UE会在该NAS消息中携带切片#1和切片#2的切片标识。AMF网元在接收到UE发送的NAS消息后,会向SMF网元进一步发送切片#1和切片#2的切片标识;由SMF网元确定建立关联与切片#1相关联的PDU Session#1,并由AMF网元通过NGAP信令(如PDU session resources setup request信令)来指示S-gNB为PDU Session#1准备RAN侧资源。After the UE accesses the S-gNB, the UE sends a NAS message to the AMF network element, which is used to request the establishment of a PDU session for slice #2. Since the UE has received the mapping relationship between slice #1 and slice #2, the UE will carry the slice identifiers of slice #1 and slice #2 in the NAS message. After receiving the NAS message sent by the UE, the AMF network element will further send the slice identifiers of slice #1 and slice #2 to the SMF network element. The SMF network element determines to establish the PDU Session #1 associated with slice #1, and the AMF network element instructs the S-gNB to prepare RAN side resources for PDU Session #1 through NGAP signaling (such as PDU session resources setup request signaling).

步骤2:UE从S-gNB的覆盖范围移动到T-gNB的覆盖范围。Step 2: The UE moves from the coverage of the S-gNB to the coverage of the T-gNB.

基于此,S-gNB需要将UE对应的会话(包括PDU Session#1)切换至T-gNB,存在以下两种不同的情况(Sol#1和Sol#2)。Based on this, S-gNB needs to switch the session corresponding to the UE (including PDU Session#1) to T-gNB. There are two different situations (Sol#1 and Sol#2).

Sol#1:即使T-gNB能够支持该PDU会话关联的切片,S-gNB也可以指示T-gNB将PDU会话拒绝准入或者去激活(也可以是挂起)。Sol#1的实现可以参考前述图5中基于Xn的切换场景下的实现方式,下面示例性的描述Sol#1的具体实现过程。Sol#1: Even if T-gNB can support the slice associated with the PDU session, S-gNB can also instruct T-gNB to deny admission or deactivate (or suspend) the PDU session. The implementation of Sol#1 can refer to the implementation method of the switching scenario based on Xn in Figure 5 above. The specific implementation process of Sol#1 is described as follows.

Sol#1的情况下,可以通过以下两种实施方式(Opt#1和Opt#2)来实现。In the case of Sol#1, it can be achieved through the following two implementations (Opt#1 and Opt#2).

Opt#1(包括步骤3至步骤6的一种实现方式,参考前述方式一):Opt#1 (an implementation method including steps 3 to 6, refer to the above-mentioned method 1):

步骤3-1:S-gNB通过XnAP信令(例如handover request信令)向T-gNB指示第一会话集合和第二会话集合;第一会话集合包括UE接入S-gNB时已经建立了的一个或多个PDU会话;第二会话集合用于指示前述一个或多个PDU会话中即使关联的切片能够被T-gNB支持,仍需要被拒绝准入或者去激活/挂起的会话。其中,第一会话集合包括PDU Session#1。应理解,第一会话集合可以用于实现PDU Session#1的切换请求的功能,例如,第一会话集合包括PDU Session#1即可以指示:“包括PDU Session#1在内的至少一个会话的切换请求”;参考图5或图6所示的通信方法,第二会话集合用于实现第一信息的功能。Step 3-1: The S-gNB indicates the first session set and the second session set to the T-gNB through XnAP signaling (e.g., handover request signaling); the first session set includes one or more PDU sessions that have been established when the UE accesses the S-gNB; the second session set is used to indicate the sessions in the aforementioned one or more PDU sessions that need to be denied access or deactivated/suspended even if the associated slices can be supported by the T-gNB. Among them, the first session set includes PDU Session#1. It should be understood that the first session set can be used to implement the function of the handover request of PDU Session#1. For example, the first session set includes PDU Session#1, which can indicate: "Handover request for at least one session including PDU Session#1"; with reference to the communication method shown in Figure 5 or Figure 6, the second session set is used to implement the function of the first information.

可选的,第二会话集合的指示方式可以是直接指示或者间接指示。例如(直接指示),第二会话集合包括PDU Session#1。又如(间接指示),第二会话集合包括PDU Session#1的原始S-NSSAI;又如,第二会话集合还可以包括UE的部分允许NSSAI(或部分拒绝NSSAI)。基于此,T-gNB可以自行确定出即使关联的切片能够被T-gNB支持,仍需要被拒绝准入或者去激活/挂起的会话。Optionally, the indication method of the second session set can be direct indication or indirect indication. For example (direct indication), the second session set includes PDU Session#1. For another example (indirect indication), the second session set includes the original S-NSSAI of PDU Session#1; for another example, the second session set can also include the UE's partial allowed NSSAI (or partial rejected NSSAI). Based on this, the T-gNB can determine by itself that even if the associated slice can be supported by the T-gNB, the session still needs to be denied access or deactivated/suspended.

可选的,在执行步骤3-1之前,S-gNB可以基于以下Alts(Alt#1和Alt#2)获取第一会话集合中一个或多个会话(包括PDU Session#1)关联的原始S-NSSAI和UE的部分允许NSSAI(或部分拒绝NSSAI),以及获取能被T-gNB支持的网络切片列表,从而确定前述第二会话集合。Optionally, before executing step 3-1, the S-gNB may obtain the original S-NSSAI associated with one or more sessions (including PDU Session#1) in the first session set and the UE's partial allowed NSSAI (or partial rejected NSSAI) based on the following Alts (Alt#1 and Alt#2), and obtain a list of network slices that can be supported by the T-gNB, thereby determining the aforementioned second session set.

Alt#1:S-gNB从AMF网元处获取PDU会话的原始S-NSSAI以及UE的部分允许NSSAI(或部分拒绝NSSAI,后续不重复赘述这种可能性,但后续实施例中的部分允许NSSAI均可以替换为部分拒绝 NSSAI);UE通过XnAP信令交互得到T-gNB管理的目标小区支持的网络切片列表。例如,S-gNB从AMF网元处获取了UE的部分允许NSSAI为切片#2,PDU Session#1的原始S-NSSAI为也为切片#2,由于目标小区支持的网络切片列表不包括切片#2,则S-gNB可以通过第二会话集合指示T-gNB拒绝或者去激活/挂起PDU Session#1。Alt#1: S-gNB obtains the original S-NSSAI of the PDU session from the AMF network element and the UE's partially allowed NSSAI (or partially rejected NSSAI, this possibility will not be repeated later, but the partially allowed NSSAI in the subsequent embodiments can be replaced by partially rejected NSSAI); UE obtains the list of network slices supported by the target cell managed by T-gNB through XnAP signaling interaction. For example, S-gNB obtains the UE's partially allowed NSSAI as slice #2 from the AMF network element, and the original S-NSSAI of PDU Session #1 is also slice #2. Since the list of network slices supported by the target cell does not include slice #2, S-gNB can instruct T-gNB to reject or deactivate/suspend PDU Session #1 through the second session set.

Alt#2:在步骤1中UE请求建立PDU会话时,如果该PDU会话的原始S-NSSAI为部分允许NSSAI,则UE可以在包含了NAS请求的RRC消息中添加原始S-NSSAI指示,从而使得S-gNB获取该PDU会话的原始S-NSSAI;S-gNB通过XnAP信令交互得到的T-gNB管理的目标小区支持的网络切片列表。例如,UE在步骤1中请求建立PDU Session#1时获取到其对应的原始S-NSSAI为切片#2,且切片#2又属于部分允许NSSAI,由于目标小区支持的网络切片列表不包括切片#2,则S-gNB可以通过第二会话集合指示T-gNB拒绝或者去激活/挂起PDU Session#1。Alt#2: When the UE requests to establish a PDU session in step 1, if the original S-NSSAI of the PDU session is a partially allowed NSSAI, the UE can add the original S-NSSAI indication in the RRC message containing the NAS request, so that the S-gNB obtains the original S-NSSAI of the PDU session; the S-gNB obtains the list of network slices supported by the target cell managed by the T-gNB through the XnAP signaling interaction. For example, when the UE requests to establish PDU Session#1 in step 1, the corresponding original S-NSSAI obtained is slice#2, and slice#2 is a partially allowed NSSAI. Since the list of network slices supported by the target cell does not include slice#2, the S-gNB can instruct the T-gNB to reject or deactivate/suspend PDU Session#1 through the second session set.

步骤4-1:T-gNB即使能够支持PDU Session#1关联的切片#1,也会向S-gNB回复的XnAP信令(例如handover request acknowledge信令)中指示PDU Session#1被拒绝准入。例如,在handover request acknowledge信令中的第三会话集合(例如PDU session resources not admitted list信元)中携带PDU Session#1的PDU会话标识(PDU Session ID)。应理解,参考图5或图6所示的通信方法,第三会话集合可以用于实现第一消息的功能。Step 4-1: Even if the T-gNB can support the slice #1 associated with PDU Session #1, it will indicate in the XnAP signaling (e.g., handover request acknowledgment signaling) replied to the S-gNB that PDU Session #1 is denied access. For example, the third session set (e.g., PDU session resources not admitted list information element) in the handover request acknowledgment signaling carries the PDU session identifier (PDU Session ID) of PDU Session #1. It should be understood that, with reference to the communication method shown in FIG. 5 or FIG. 6, the third session set can be used to implement the function of the first message.

步骤5-1:T-gNB向AMF网元通过NGAP信令(例如path switch request信令)中的第四会话集合通知RAN侧资源准备失败的PDU会话。例如,第四会话集合(PDU session resource failed to setup list信元)中携带PDU Session#1的PDU Session ID。应理解,参考图5或图6所示的通信方法,第四会话集合可以用于实现第二消息的功能。Step 5-1: T-gNB notifies the AMF network element of the PDU session for which resource preparation failed on the RAN side through the fourth session set in NGAP signaling (e.g., path switch request signaling). For example, the fourth session set (PDU session resource failed to setup list information element) carries the PDU Session ID of PDU Session#1. It should be understood that, with reference to the communication method shown in FIG. 5 or FIG. 6, the fourth session set can be used to implement the function of the second message.

步骤6-1:AMF网元通过NGAP信令(例如path switch request acknowledge信令)通知T-gNB已经被成功切换的用户面路径。可选的,参考图5或图6所示的通信方法,AMF网元还可以通知T-gNB释放PDU Session#1的准入资源,例如,AMF网元向T-gNB发送前述第一响应消息。Step 6-1: The AMF network element notifies the T-gNB of the user plane path that has been successfully switched through NGAP signaling (e.g., path switch request acknowledgment signaling). Optionally, referring to the communication method shown in FIG. 5 or FIG. 6 , the AMF network element may also notify the T-gNB to release the access resources of PDU Session#1, for example, the AMF network element sends the aforementioned first response message to the T-gNB.

Opt#2(步骤3至步骤6的另一种实现方式,参考前述方式二):Opt#2 (another implementation of steps 3 to 6, refer to the above-mentioned method 2):

步骤3-2:S-gNB通过XnAP信令(例如handover request信令)向T-gNB指示第一会话集合和第二会话集合。具体实现过程可以参考步骤3-1,此处不再赘述。Step 3-2: The S-gNB indicates the first session set and the second session set to the T-gNB through XnAP signaling (e.g., handover request signaling). The specific implementation process can be referred to step 3-1 and will not be repeated here.

步骤4-2:T-gNB在回复S-gNB的XnAP信令(例如handover request acknowledge信令)中将PDU Session#1设置为准入,但是实际并不会为该PDU会话准备RAN侧资源。例如,在handover request acknowledge信令中的第五会话集合(例如PDU session resources admitted list信元)携带PDU Session#1的PDU Session ID,但是不会为该PDU会话建立空口的DRB资源。应理解,参考图5或图6所示的通信方法,第五会话集合可以用于实现第三消息的功能。Step 4-2: T-gNB sets PDU Session #1 as admitted in the XnAP signaling (e.g., handover request acknowledge signaling) in reply to S-gNB, but does not actually prepare RAN side resources for the PDU session. For example, the fifth session set (e.g., PDU session resources admitted list IE) in the handover request acknowledge signaling carries the PDU Session ID of PDU Session #1, but does not establish air interface DRB resources for the PDU session. It should be understood that, with reference to the communication method shown in FIG. 5 or FIG. 6, the fifth session set can be used to implement the function of the third message.

步骤5-2:T-gNB向AMF网元通过NGAP信令(例如path switch request信令)通知已经准入了的PDU会话和RAN侧资源准备失败的PDU会话。应理解,参考图5或图6所示的通信方法,步骤5-2的动作可以通过第四消息实现。具体实现过程可以参考步骤5-1,此处不再赘述。Step 5-2: T-gNB notifies the AMF network element of the PDU sessions that have been admitted and the PDU sessions for which the RAN side resource preparation failed through NGAP signaling (e.g., path switch request signaling). It should be understood that, with reference to the communication method shown in FIG. 5 or FIG. 6, the action of step 5-2 can be implemented through the fourth message. The specific implementation process can refer to step 5-1, which will not be repeated here.

步骤6-2:AMF网元通过NGAP信令(例如path switch request acknowledge信令)通知T-gNB已经被成功切换的用户面路径。可选的,参考图5或图6所示的通信方法,AMF网元还可以通知T-gNB释放PDU Session#1的准入资源,例如,AMF网元向T-gNB发送前述第一响应消息。具体实现过程可以参考步骤6-1。Step 6-2: The AMF network element notifies the T-gNB of the user plane path that has been successfully switched through NGAP signaling (e.g., path switch request acknowledge signaling). Optionally, referring to the communication method shown in FIG. 5 or FIG. 6, the AMF network element may also notify the T-gNB to release the access resources of PDU Session#1, for example, the AMF network element sends the aforementioned first response message to the T-gNB. For the specific implementation process, please refer to step 6-1.

Sol#2:T-gNB按照PDU会话关联的切片将该PDU会话准入,由AMF网元指示T-gNB将PDU会话在RAN侧(即T-gNB侧)的资源释放或者将该PDU会话去激活(也可以是挂起)。Sol#2的实现可以参考前述图8中基于Xn的切换场景下的实现方式,下面示例性的描述Sol#2的具体实现过程。Sol#2: T-gNB admits the PDU session according to the slice associated with the PDU session, and the AMF network element instructs T-gNB to release the resources of the PDU session on the RAN side (i.e., the T-gNB side) or deactivate (or suspend) the PDU session. The implementation of Sol#2 can refer to the implementation method based on the Xn switching scenario in Figure 8 above. The specific implementation process of Sol#2 is described as an example below.

Sol#2的情况下,可以通过以下实施方式(Opt#3)来实现。In the case of Sol#2, it can be achieved through the following implementation (Opt#3).

Opt#3(步骤3至步骤6的另一种实现方式):Opt#3 (another way to implement steps 3 to 6):

步骤3-3:S-gNB通过XnAP信令(例如handover request信令)向T-gNB指示第一会话集合,第一会话集合包括PDU Session#1。Step 3-3: The S-gNB indicates the first session set to the T-gNB through XnAP signaling (e.g., handover request signaling), and the first session set includes PDU Session#1.

步骤4-3:T-gNB按照PDU Session#1关联的切片#1允许该PDU会话准入,并在回复的XnAP信令(例如handover request acknowledge信令)中将PDU Session#1设置为准入。例如,在handover request acknowledge信令中的第六会话集合(例如PDU session resources admitted list信元)中携带PDU Session#1 的PDU Session ID。此时T-gNB会为PDU Session#1准备RAN侧资源,即建立该PDU会话的RAN侧资源。应理解,参考图8或图9所示的通信方法,第六会话集合可以用于实现第四响应消息的功能。Step 4-3: T-gNB allows PDU Session #1 to be admitted according to slice #1 associated with PDU Session #1, and sets PDU Session #1 as admitted in the reply XnAP signaling (e.g., handover request acknowledge signaling). For example, PDU Session #1 is carried in the sixth session set (e.g., PDU session resources admitted list IE) in the handover request acknowledge signaling. PDU Session ID. At this time, T-gNB will prepare RAN side resources for PDU Session #1, that is, establish the RAN side resources of the PDU session. It should be understood that, with reference to the communication method shown in Figure 8 or Figure 9, the sixth session set can be used to implement the function of the fourth response message.

步骤5-3:T-gNB向AMF网元通过NGAP信令(例如path switch request信令)通知已经准入了的PDU会话,比如通过path switch request信令中的第七会话集合(例如PDU session resource to be switched in downlink list信元)中携带PDU Session#1的PDU Session ID。应理解,参考图8或图9所示的通信方法,第七会话集合可以用于实现PDU Session#1的切换请求的功能以及第七消息的功能,例如,第七会话集合包括PDU Session#1即可以指示:“包括PDU Session#1在内的至少一个会话的切换请求,且T-gNB已经对PDU Session#1进行准入处理”。Step 5-3: T-gNB notifies the AMF network element of the PDU session that has been admitted through NGAP signaling (e.g., path switch request signaling), for example, through the seventh session set in the path switch request signaling (e.g., PDU session resource to be switched in downlink list information element) carrying the PDU Session ID of PDU Session #1. It should be understood that, with reference to the communication method shown in FIG8 or FIG9, the seventh session set can be used to implement the function of the switching request of PDU Session #1 and the function of the seventh message. For example, the seventh session set includes PDU Session #1, which can indicate: "a switching request for at least one session including PDU Session #1, and T-gNB has already performed admission processing on PDU Session #1".

步骤6-3:AMF网元确定PDU Session#1对应的原始S-NSSAI为T-gNB不能支持的切片#2;AMF网元通过path switch request acknowledge信令指示T-gNB将已经为PDU Session#1准备的RAN侧资源释放掉,例如,在path switch request acknowledge信令中的第八会话集合(例如PDU session resource released list信元)中的携带PDU Session#1的PDU Session ID;AMF网元还可以将PDU Session#1拒绝或者去激活/挂起。应理解,参考图8或图9所示的通信方法,第八会话集合可以用于实现第四信息的功能。Step 6-3: The AMF network element determines that the original S-NSSAI corresponding to PDU Session #1 is slice #2 that T-gNB cannot support; the AMF network element instructs T-gNB to release the RAN side resources prepared for PDU Session #1 through path switch request acknowledge signaling, for example, the PDU Session ID carrying PDU Session #1 in the eighth session set (e.g., PDU session resource released list information element) in the path switch request acknowledge signaling; the AMF network element may also reject or deactivate/suspend PDU Session #1. It should be understood that, with reference to the communication method shown in FIG. 8 or FIG. 9, the eighth session set may be used to implement the function of the fourth information.

可选的,AMF网元在发送path switch request acknowledge信令之前,还可以进一步确定切片#2为部分允许NSSAI(或部分拒绝NSSAI)。Optionally, the AMF network element may further determine that slice #2 partially allows NSSAI (or partially rejects NSSAI) before sending the path switch request acknowledgment signaling.

图12是本申请实施例提供的另一种通信方法的示例图,该方法示出了图5和图8所示通信方法的部分实现方式,应用于如图4所示的情景下的NG切换场景中。该方法可应用于图1所示的通信系统中,在该示例中,前述接入网设备包括源基站(用S-gNB表示)和目标基站(用T-gNB表示),终端设备(用UE表示),前述核心网设备的功能由AMF网元和SMF网元实现。FIG12 is an example diagram of another communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application, which shows a partial implementation of the communication method shown in FIG5 and FIG8, and is applied to the NG switching scenario in the scenario shown in FIG4. The method can be applied to the communication system shown in FIG1. In this example, the aforementioned access network equipment includes a source base station (represented by S-gNB) and a target base station (represented by T-gNB), a terminal device (represented by UE), and the functions of the aforementioned core network equipment are implemented by AMF network elements and SMF network elements.

步骤a:建立PDU Session#1。具体实现过程可以参考步骤1,此处不再赘述。Step a: Establish PDU Session #1. The specific implementation process can be referred to step 1 and will not be repeated here.

步骤b:UE从S-gNB的覆盖范围移动到T-gNB的覆盖范围。Step b: The UE moves from the coverage of the S-gNB to the coverage of the T-gNB.

步骤c:S-gNB通过NGAP信令(例如handover required信令)向AMF网元指示第九会话集合(参考前述第一会话集合)和/或第十会话集合(参考前述第二会话集合);第九会话集合包括PDU Session#1。具体实现过程可以参考步骤3-1,此处不再赘述。可选的,前述第十会话集合可以是经由AMF网元透传至T-gNB的。应理解,第九会话集合可以用于实现PDU Session#1的切换请求的功能,例如,第九会话集合包括PDU Session#1即可以指示:“包括PDU Session#1在内的至少一个会话的切换请求”;参考图5所示的通信方法,第十会话集合用于实现第一信息的功能。Step c: The S-gNB indicates the ninth session set (refer to the aforementioned first session set) and/or the tenth session set (refer to the aforementioned second session set) to the AMF network element through NGAP signaling (such as handover required signaling); the ninth session set includes PDU Session#1. The specific implementation process can refer to step 3-1 and will not be repeated here. Optionally, the aforementioned tenth session set can be transparently transmitted to the T-gNB via the AMF network element. It should be understood that the ninth session set can be used to implement the function of the handover request of PDU Session#1. For example, the ninth session set includes PDU Session#1, which can indicate: "Handover request for at least one session including PDU Session#1"; with reference to the communication method shown in Figure 5, the tenth session set is used to implement the function of the first information.

在步骤c之后,各设备对PDU Session#1的处理方式存在以下两种不同的情况(Sol#3和Sol#4)。After step c, each device handles PDU Session#1 in two different ways (Sol#3 and Sol#4).

Sol#3:即使T-gNB能够支持该PDU会话关联的切片,T-gNB也可以基于AMF网元的指示将PDU会话拒绝准入或者去激活(也可以是挂起)。Sol#3的实现可以参考前述图5中基于NG的切换场景下的实现方式,下面示例性的描述Sol#3的具体实现过程。Sol#3: Even if T-gNB can support the slice associated with the PDU session, T-gNB can also deny admission or deactivate (or suspend) the PDU session based on the instruction of the AMF network element. The implementation of Sol#3 can refer to the implementation method based on the NG switching scenario in Figure 5 above. The specific implementation process of Sol#3 is described as follows.

Sol#3的情况下,可以通过以下两种实施方式(Opt#4和Opt#5)来实现。In the case of Sol#3, it can be achieved through the following two implementations (Opt#4 and Opt#5).

Opt#4(包括步骤d至步骤f的一种实现方式,参考前述方式1):Opt#4 (an implementation method including steps d to f, refer to the above-mentioned method 1):

步骤d-4:AMF网元通过NGAP信令(例如handover request信令)向T-gNB指示第九会话集合和/或第十会话集合;其中,第十会话集合用于指示前述一个或多个PDU会话中即使关联的切片能够被T-gNB支持,仍需要被拒绝准入或者去激活/挂起的会话。可选的,前述第十会话集合可以是从S-gNB经由AMF网元透传至T-gNB的。Step d-4: The AMF network element indicates the ninth session set and/or the tenth session set to the T-gNB through NGAP signaling (e.g., handover request signaling); wherein the tenth session set is used to indicate the sessions in the aforementioned one or more PDU sessions that need to be denied admission or deactivated/suspended even if the associated slices can be supported by the T-gNB. Optionally, the aforementioned tenth session set can be transparently transmitted from the S-gNB to the T-gNB via the AMF network element.

可选的,第十会话集合的指示方式可以是直接指示或者间接指示。具体实现过程可以参考步骤3-1,此处不再赘述。Optionally, the indication mode of the tenth session set may be direct indication or indirect indication. The specific implementation process may refer to step 3-1, which will not be described in detail here.

步骤e-4:T-gNB即使能够支持PDU Session#1关联的切片#1,也会向AMF网元回复的NGAP信令(例如handover request acknowledge信令)中指示PDU Session#1被拒绝准入。例如,在handover request acknowledge信令中的第十一会话集合(PDU session resources failed to setup list信元)中携带PDU Session#1的PDU Session ID。应理解,参考图5或图7所示的通信方法,第十一会话集合可以用于实现第五消息的功能。Step e-4: Even if the T-gNB can support slice #1 associated with PDU Session #1, it will indicate in the NGAP signaling (e.g., handover request acknowledgment signaling) replied to the AMF network element that PDU Session #1 is denied access. For example, the eleventh session set (PDU session resources failed to setup list information element) in the handover request acknowledgment signaling carries the PDU Session ID of PDU Session #1. It should be understood that, with reference to the communication method shown in FIG. 5 or FIG. 7, the eleventh session set can be used to implement the function of the fifth message.

步骤f-4:AMF网元可以通过NGAP信令(例如handover command信令)向S-gNB指示待释放的会话。例如,在handover command信令中的第十二会话集合(PDU session resource to release list信元) 中携带PDU Session#1的PDU Session ID。应理解,参考图5或图7所示的通信方法,第十二会话集合可以用于实现第三响应消息的功能。Step f-4: The AMF network element may indicate the session to be released to the S-gNB via NGAP signaling (e.g., handover command signaling). For example, the twelfth session set (PDU session resource to release list cell) in the handover command signaling The PDU Session ID of PDU Session#1 is carried in the twelfth session set. It should be understood that, with reference to the communication method shown in FIG. 5 or FIG. 7 , the twelfth session set can be used to implement the function of the third response message.

Opt#5(包括步骤d至步骤f的另一种实现方式,参考前述方式2):Opt#5 (another implementation method including steps d to f, refer to the aforementioned method 2):

步骤d-5:AMF网元通过NGAP信令(例如handover request信令)向T-gNB发送第九会话集合和/或第十会话集合。具体实现过程可以参考步骤d-4,此处不再赘述。Step d-5: The AMF network element sends the ninth session set and/or the tenth session set to the T-gNB through NGAP signaling (e.g., handover request signaling). The specific implementation process can refer to step d-4 and will not be repeated here.

步骤e-5:T-gNB在回复的NGAP信令(例如handover request acknowledge信令)中将PDU Session#1设置为准入,但是实际并不会为该PDU会话准备RAN侧资源。例如,在handover request acknowledge信令中的第十三会话集合(例如PDU session resources admitted list信元)携带PDU Session#1的PDU Session ID,但是不会为该PDU会话建立空口的DRB资源。应理解,参考图5或图7所示的通信方法,第十三会话集合可以用于实现第四消息的功能。Step e-5: T-gNB sets PDU Session #1 as admitted in the reply NGAP signaling (e.g., handover request acknowledge signaling), but does not actually prepare RAN side resources for the PDU session. For example, the thirteenth session set (e.g., PDU session resources admitted list IE) in the handover request acknowledge signaling carries the PDU Session ID of PDU Session #1, but does not establish air interface DRB resources for the PDU session. It should be understood that, with reference to the communication method shown in FIG. 5 or FIG. 7, the thirteenth session set can be used to implement the function of the fourth message.

步骤f-5:AMF网元可以通过NGAP信令(例如handover command信令)向S-gNB指示需要释放的会话。例如,在handover command信令中的第十四会话集合(PDU session resource to release list信元)中携带PDU Session#1的PDU Session ID。应理解,参考图5或图7所示的通信方法,第十四会话集合可以用于实现第三响应消息的功能。Step f-5: The AMF network element may indicate to the S-gNB the session to be released through NGAP signaling (e.g., handover command signaling). For example, the PDU Session ID of PDU Session#1 is carried in the fourteenth session set (PDU session resource to release list information element) in the handover command signaling. It should be understood that, with reference to the communication method shown in FIG. 5 or FIG. 7 , the fourteenth session set may be used to implement the function of the third response message.

可选的,在AMF网元执行步骤f-5之前,AMF网元还可以对T-gNB指示的准入的会话再次进行判断。判断过程包括:AMF确定PDU Session#1对应的原始S-NSSAI为T-gNB不能支持的切片#2;可选的,AMF网元进一步确定切片#2为部分允许NSSAI(或部分拒绝NSSAI)。Optionally, before the AMF network element executes step f-5, the AMF network element may further determine the admitted session indicated by the T-gNB. The judgment process includes: the AMF determines that the original S-NSSAI corresponding to the PDU Session#1 is the slice #2 that the T-gNB cannot support; Optionally, the AMF network element further determines that the slice #2 is partially allowed NSSAI (or partially rejected NSSAI).

可选的,AMF网元还可以将PDU会话去激活。Optionally, the AMF network element can also deactivate the PDU session.

Sol#4:AMF网元将PDU会话去激活(也可以是挂起),相应的,后续会话相关的信令(例如handover request信令)中不包括该PDU会话。Sol#4的实现可以参考前述图8中基于NG的切换场景下的实现方式,下面示例性的描述Sol#4的具体实现过程。Sol#4: The AMF network element deactivates (or suspends) the PDU session. Accordingly, the subsequent session-related signaling (such as handover request signaling) does not include the PDU session. The implementation of Sol#4 can refer to the implementation method in the NG-based handover scenario in Figure 8 above. The specific implementation process of Sol#4 is described as follows.

Sol#4的情况下,可以通过以下实施方式(Opt#6)来实现。In the case of Sol#4, it can be achieved by the following implementation (Opt#6).

Opt#6(包括步骤d至步骤f的另一种实现方式):Opt#6 (another implementation method including steps d to f):

步骤d-6:在AMF网元确定PDU Session#1对应的原始S-NSSAI为T-gNB不能支持的切片#2之后,AMF网元可以将该PDU会话去激活,从而PDU Session#1的PDU Session ID不会呈现在后续的流程中。例如,在步骤d-6之后,AMF网元向T-gNB发送的handover request信令中的第十五会话集合(例如PDU session resource setup list信元)中不会包含该PDU会话的PDU Session ID。Step d-6: After the AMF network element determines that the original S-NSSAI corresponding to PDU Session #1 is slice #2 that T-gNB cannot support, the AMF network element can deactivate the PDU session so that the PDU Session ID of PDU Session #1 will not appear in the subsequent process. For example, after step d-6, the fifteenth session set (e.g., PDU session resource setup list cell) in the handover request signaling sent by the AMF network element to the T-gNB will not contain the PDU Session ID of the PDU session.

可选的,AMF网元还可以进一步确定切片#2为部分允许NSSAI(或部分拒绝NSSAI)。Optionally, the AMF network element may further determine that slice #2 is partially allowed NSSAI (or partially rejected NSSAI).

步骤e-6:T-gNB根据AMF网元指示的已建立的PDU会话及其关联的切片进行准入控制,并通过NGAP信令(例如handover request acknowledge信令)向AMF网元反馈第十六会话集合,第十六会话集合用于指示准入成功/失败的PDU会话,第十六会话集合不包括PDU Session#1。应理解,参考图8或图10所示的通信方法,第十六会话集合可以用于实现第五响应消息的功能。Step e-6: T-gNB performs admission control according to the established PDU session and its associated slices indicated by the AMF network element, and feeds back the sixteenth session set to the AMF network element through NGAP signaling (e.g., handover request acknowledgment signaling). The sixteenth session set is used to indicate the PDU session of successful/failed admission, and the sixteenth session set does not include PDU Session #1. It should be understood that, with reference to the communication method shown in FIG. 8 or FIG. 10, the sixteenth session set can be used to implement the function of the fifth response message.

步骤f-6:AMF网元可以通过NGAP信令(例如通过handover command信令)向S-gNB指示T-gNB侧用于切换的资源已经准备好。例如,AMF网元向S-gNB发送的handover command信令中携带第十七会话集合,第十七会话集合用于指示成功被切换的PDU会话和/或需要释放的PDU会话,第十七会话集合不包括PDU Session#1。应理解,参考图8或图10所示的通信方法,第十七会话集合可以用于实现第六响应消息的功能。Step f-6: The AMF network element may indicate to the S-gNB through NGAP signaling (e.g., through handover command signaling) that the resources for handover on the T-gNB side are ready. For example, the handover command signaling sent by the AMF network element to the S-gNB carries the seventeenth session set, which is used to indicate the successfully switched PDU sessions and/or the PDU sessions that need to be released, and the seventeenth session set does not include PDU Session#1. It should be understood that, with reference to the communication method shown in FIG8 or FIG10, the seventeenth session set can be used to implement the function of the sixth response message.

以上结合附图介绍了本申请实施例提供的方法,以下结合附图介绍本申请实施例提供的通信装置。The method provided in the embodiment of the present application is introduced above in combination with the accompanying drawings. The communication device provided in the embodiment of the present application is introduced below in combination with the accompanying drawings.

基于相同的技术构思,本申请还提供了一种通信装置,该通信装置用于实现以上实施例提供的通信方法。参阅图13所示,通信装置1300中包含通信单元1301和处理单元1302,通信单元1301,用于接收和发送数据;处理单元1302,用于实现图5或图8所示的通信方法中的步骤。所述通信装置1300可以应用于图1所示的通信系统中的终端设备、接入网设备或核心网设备,并可以实现以上本申请实施例以及实例提供的通信方法。下面对所述通信装置1300中的各个单元的功能进行介绍。Based on the same technical concept, the present application also provides a communication device, which is used to implement the communication method provided in the above embodiments. Referring to Figure 13, the communication device 1300 includes a communication unit 1301 and a processing unit 1302, the communication unit 1301 is used to receive and send data; the processing unit 1302 is used to implement the steps in the communication method shown in Figure 5 or Figure 8. The communication device 1300 can be applied to a terminal device, an access network device or a core network device in the communication system shown in Figure 1, and can implement the communication method provided in the above embodiments and examples of the present application. The functions of each unit in the communication device 1300 are introduced below.

在一种可能的示例中,该通信装置1300可以用于实现前述图5、图6或图7中第一设备的动作。通信单元1301用于:接收来自第二设备的切换请求;切换请求用于请求将第一会话切换至第一设备;第一会话关联的网络切片为第一网络切片,且第一会话用于为终端设备提供第二网络切片对应的服务; 第一设备为第一小区的管理设备,第一小区支持的网络切片列表包括第一网络切片的标识,且不包括第二网络切片的标识;通信单元1301还用于:接收来自第二设备的第一信息;第一信息用于指示对第一会话的处理方式为拒绝准入或者去激活。In a possible example, the communication device 1300 can be used to implement the actions of the first device in Figure 5, Figure 6 or Figure 7. The communication unit 1301 is used to: receive a switching request from the second device; the switching request is used to request to switch the first session to the first device; the network slice associated with the first session is the first network slice, and the first session is used to provide the terminal device with a service corresponding to the second network slice; The first device is a management device of the first cell, and the list of network slices supported by the first cell includes the identifier of the first network slice, but does not include the identifier of the second network slice; the communication unit 1301 is also used to: receive first information from the second device; the first information is used to indicate that the processing method for the first session is to deny access or deactivate.

在一种可能的设计中,处理单元1302用于:根据第一信息,对第一会话进行拒绝准入或者去激活的操作。In one possible design, the processing unit 1302 is used to: deny access to or deactivate the first session based on the first information.

在一种可能的设计中,第一信息包括第二网络切片的标识,当网络切片列表不包括第二网络切片的标识时,处理单元1302用于:对第一会话进行拒绝准入或者去激活的操作。In one possible design, the first information includes an identifier of the second network slice. When the network slice list does not include the identifier of the second network slice, the processing unit 1302 is used to deny access to or deactivate the first session.

在一种可能的设计中,第一信息还包括:至少一个第一类网络切片的标识或者至少一个第二类网络切片的标识;第一类网络切片为允许在终端设备的注册区域中部分区域内使用的网络切片,第二类网络切片为不允许在注册区域中部分区域内使用的网络切片;处理单元1302还用于:确定至少一个第一类网络切片的标识包括第二网络切片的标识;或者,处理单元1302还用于:确定至少一个第二类网络切片的标识包括第二网络切片的标识。In a possible design, the first information also includes: an identifier of at least one first-class network slice or an identifier of at least one second-class network slice; the first-class network slice is a network slice that is allowed to be used in a part of the registration area of the terminal device, and the second-class network slice is a network slice that is not allowed to be used in a part of the registration area; the processing unit 1302 is also used to: determine that the identifier of at least one first-class network slice includes the identifier of the second network slice; or, the processing unit 1302 is also used to: determine that the identifier of at least one second-class network slice includes the identifier of the second network slice.

在一种可能的设计中,当终端设备从第二小区移动至第一小区时,第二设备为第二小区的管理设备,第三设备为核心网设备。In one possible design, when the terminal device moves from the second cell to the first cell, the second device is a management device of the second cell, and the third device is a core network device.

在一种可能的设计中,通信单元1301还用于:根据第一信息,向第二设备发送第一消息;第一消息用于指示第一设备对第一会话的处理方式为拒绝准入或者去激活;通信单元1301还用于:向第三设备发送第二消息;第二消息用于指示第一会话的资源建立失败。In one possible design, the communication unit 1301 is also used to: send a first message to a second device based on the first information; the first message is used to indicate that the first device handles the first session by denying access or deactivating the session; the communication unit 1301 is also used to: send a second message to a third device; the second message is used to indicate that resource establishment of the first session failed.

在一种可能的设计中,通信单元1301还用于:向第二设备发送第三消息;第三消息用于指示第一设备对第一会话的处理方式为允许准入;通信单元1301还用于:根据第一信息,向第三设备发送第四消息;第四消息用于指示第一会话的资源建立失败。In one possible design, the communication unit 1301 is also used to: send a third message to the second device; the third message is used to indicate that the first device handles the first session as allowing access; the communication unit 1301 is also used to: send a fourth message to the third device based on the first information; the fourth message is used to indicate that resource establishment of the first session failed.

在一种可能的设计中,通信单元1301还用于:接收来自第三设备的第一响应消息;第一响应消息用于指示释放第一会话的准入资源。In a possible design, the communication unit 1301 is further used to: receive a first response message from a third device; the first response message is used to indicate the release of access resources for the first session.

在一种可能的设计中,通信单元1301还用于:向第二设备发送第三消息;第三消息用于指示第一设备对第一会话的处理方式为允许准入;通信单元1301还用于:向第三设备发送第八消息;第八消息用于指示第一会话的资源建立成功;通信单元1301还用于:接收来自第三设备的第二响应消息,第二响应消息用于指示释放第一会话的准入资源。In one possible design, the communication unit 1301 is also used to: send a third message to the second device; the third message is used to indicate that the first device handles the first session as allowing access; the communication unit 1301 is also used to: send an eighth message to the third device; the eighth message is used to indicate that the resources for the first session are successfully established; the communication unit 1301 is also used to: receive a second response message from the third device, and the second response message is used to indicate the release of the access resources for the first session.

在一种可能的设计中,第二设备为核心网设备。In one possible design, the second device is a core network device.

在一种可能的设计中,通信单元1301还用于:根据第一信息,向第二设备发送第五消息;第五消息用于指示第一设备对第一会话的处理方式为拒绝准入或者去激活。In a possible design, the communication unit 1301 is further used to: send a fifth message to the second device based on the first information; the fifth message is used to indicate that the first device handles the first session by denying access or deactivating the session.

在一种可能的设计中,通信单元1301还用于:向第二设备发送第六消息;第六消息用于指示第一设备对第一会话的处理方式为允许准入。In a possible design, the communication unit 1301 is further used to: send a sixth message to the second device; the sixth message is used to indicate that the first device processes the first session as allowing access.

在另一种可能的示例中,该通信装置1300可以用于实现前述图5、图6或图7中第二设备的动作。通信单元1301用于:向第一设备发送的切换请求;切换请求用于请求将第一会话切换至第一设备;第一会话关联的网络切片为第一网络切片,且第一会话用于为终端设备提供第二网络切片对应的服务;第一设备为第一小区的管理设备,第一小区支持的网络切片列表包括第一网络切片的标识;当网络切片列表不包括第二网络切片的标识时,通信单元1301还用于:向第一设备发送第一信息;第一信息用于指示对第一会话的处理方式为拒绝准入或者去激活。In another possible example, the communication device 1300 can be used to implement the actions of the second device in Figure 5, Figure 6 or Figure 7. The communication unit 1301 is used to: send a handover request to the first device; the handover request is used to request to switch the first session to the first device; the network slice associated with the first session is the first network slice, and the first session is used to provide the terminal device with a service corresponding to the second network slice; the first device is a management device of the first cell, and the list of network slices supported by the first cell includes the identifier of the first network slice; when the network slice list does not include the identifier of the second network slice, the communication unit 1301 is also used to: send first information to the first device; the first information is used to indicate that the processing method for the first session is to deny access or deactivate.

在一种可能的设计中,第一信息还包括第二网络切片的标识。In one possible design, the first information also includes an identifier of the second network slice.

在一种可能的设计中,第一信息还包括:至少一个第一类网络切片的标识或者至少一个第二类网络切片的标识;第一类网络切片为允许在终端设备的注册区域中部分区域内使用的网络切片,第二类网络切片为不允许在注册区域中部分区域内使用的网络切片。In a possible design, the first information also includes: an identifier of at least one first-class network slice or an identifier of at least one second-class network slice; the first-class network slice is a network slice that is allowed to be used in part of the registration area of the terminal device, and the second-class network slice is a network slice that is not allowed to be used in part of the registration area.

在一种可能的设计中,当终端设备从第二小区移动至第一小区时,第二设备为第二小区的管理设备。In a possible design, when the terminal device moves from the second cell to the first cell, the second device is a management device of the second cell.

在一种可能的设计中,通信单元1301还用于:接收来自终端设备的第二信息;第二信息包括第二网络切片的标识;第二网络切片为允许在终端设备的注册区域中部分区域内使用的网络切片,或者,第二网络切片为不允许在注册区域中部分区域内使用的网络切片。In a possible design, the communication unit 1301 is also used to: receive second information from the terminal device; the second information includes an identifier of a second network slice; the second network slice is a network slice that is allowed to be used in a part of the registration area of the terminal device, or the second network slice is a network slice that is not allowed to be used in a part of the registration area.

在一种可能的设计中,第三设备为核心网设备,通信单元1301还用于:接收来自第三设备的第三信息;第三信息包括第二网络切片的标识,第三信息还包括至少一个第一类网络切片的标识和/或至少一个第二类网络切片列表的标识;第一类网络切片为允许在终端设备的注册区域中部分区域内使用的网 络切片,第二类网络切片为不允许在注册区域中部分区域内使用的网络切片;处理单元1302用于:确定至少一个第一类网络切片的标识包括第二网络切片的标识;或者,处理单元1302用于:确定至少一个第二类网络切片的标识包括第二网络切片的标识。In a possible design, the third device is a core network device, and the communication unit 1301 is further used to: receive third information from the third device; the third information includes an identifier of the second network slice, and the third information also includes an identifier of at least one first-class network slice and/or an identifier of at least one second-class network slice list; the first-class network slice is a network slice allowed to be used in a part of the registration area of the terminal device. The second type of network slice is a network slice that is not allowed to be used in part of the registration area; the processing unit 1302 is used to: determine that the identifier of at least one first type of network slice includes the identifier of the second network slice; or the processing unit 1302 is used to: determine that the identifier of at least one second type of network slice includes the identifier of the second network slice.

在一种可能的设计中,通信单元1301还用于:接收来自第一设备的第一消息;第一消息用于指示第一设备对第一会话的处理方式为拒绝准入或者去激活。In a possible design, the communication unit 1301 is further used to: receive a first message from the first device; the first message is used to indicate that the first device handles the first session by denying access or deactivating the session.

在一种可能的设计中,通信单元1301还用于:收来自第一设备的第三消息;第三消息用于指示第一设备对第一会话的处理方式为允许准入。In one possible design, the communication unit 1301 is further used to: receive a third message from the first device; the third message is used to indicate that the first device handles the first session as allowing access.

在一种可能的设计中,第二设备为核心网设备。In one possible design, the second device is a core network device.

在一种可能的设计中,处理单元1302用于:确定第二网络切片为允许在终端设备的注册区域中部分区域内使用的网络切片;或者,处理单元1302用于:确定第二网络切片为不允许在注册区域中部分区域内使用的网络切片。In one possible design, the processing unit 1302 is used to: determine that the second network slice is a network slice that is allowed to be used in a partial area of the registration area of the terminal device; or, the processing unit 1302 is used to: determine that the second network slice is a network slice that is not allowed to be used in a partial area of the registration area.

在一种可能的设计中,通信单元1301还用于:接收来自第一设备的第五消息;第五消息用于指示第一设备对第一会话的处理方式为拒绝准入或者去激活。In a possible design, the communication unit 1301 is further used to: receive a fifth message from the first device; the fifth message is used to indicate that the first device handles the first session by denying access or deactivating the session.

在一种可能的设计中,通信单元1301还用于:接收来自第一设备的第六消息;第六消息用于指示第一设备对第一会话的处理方式为允许准入。In a possible design, the communication unit 1301 is further used to: receive a sixth message from the first device; the sixth message is used to indicate that the first device processes the first session as allowing access.

在一种可能的设计中,当终端设备从第三小区移动至第一小区时,第四设备为第三小区的管理设备,通信单元1301还用于:接收来自第四设备的切换请求;通信单元1301还用于:向第四设备发送第三响应消息;第三响应消息用于指示释放第一会话的准入资源。In one possible design, when the terminal device moves from the third cell to the first cell, the fourth device is the management device of the third cell, and the communication unit 1301 is also used to: receive a switching request from the fourth device; the communication unit 1301 is also used to: send a third response message to the fourth device; the third response message is used to indicate the release of the access resources of the first session.

在一种可能的设计中,当终端设备从第三小区移动至第一小区时,第四设备为第三小区的管理设备,通信单元1301还用于:接收来自第四设备的第一信息。In a possible design, when the terminal device moves from the third cell to the first cell, the fourth device is a management device of the third cell, and the communication unit 1301 is further used to: receive first information from the fourth device.

在另一种可能的示例中,该通信装置1300可以用于实现前述图5或图6中第三设备的动作。通信单元1301用于:接收来自第一设备的第八消息;第八消息用于指示第一会话的资源建立成功;第一会话关联的网络切片为第一网络切片,且第一会话用于为终端设备提供第二网络切片对应的服务;第一设备为第一小区的管理设备,第一小区支持的网络切片列表包括第一网络切片的标识;当网络切片列表不包括第二网络切片的标识时,通信单元1301还用于:向第一设备发送第二响应消息;第二响应消息用于指示释放第一会话的准入资源;第三设备为核心网设备。In another possible example, the communication device 1300 can be used to implement the actions of the third device in Figure 5 or Figure 6. The communication unit 1301 is used to: receive an eighth message from the first device; the eighth message is used to indicate that the resources of the first session are successfully established; the network slice associated with the first session is the first network slice, and the first session is used to provide the terminal device with a service corresponding to the second network slice; the first device is a management device of the first cell, and the list of network slices supported by the first cell includes the identifier of the first network slice; when the network slice list does not include the identifier of the second network slice, the communication unit 1301 is also used to: send a second response message to the first device; the second response message is used to indicate the release of the access resources of the first session; the third device is a core network device.

在一种可能的设计中,处理单元1302用于:确定第二网络切片为允许在终端设备的注册区域中部分区域内使用的网络切片;或者,处理单元1302还用于:确定第二网络切片为不允许在注册区域中部分区域内使用的网络切片。In one possible design, the processing unit 1302 is used to: determine that the second network slice is a network slice that is allowed to be used in a partial area of the registration area of the terminal device; or, the processing unit 1302 is also used to: determine that the second network slice is a network slice that is not allowed to be used in a partial area of the registration area.

在另一种可能的示例中,该通信装置1300可以用于实现前述图8、图9或图10中第五设备的动作。通信单元1301用于:接收切换请求,切换请求用于请求将第二会话切换至第六设备;第二会话关联的网络切片为第一网络切片,且第二会话用于为终端设备提供第二网络切片对应的服务;第五设备为核心网设备;第六设备是第一小区的管理设备,第一小区支持的网络切片列表包括第一网络切片的标识;当网络切片列表不包括第二网络切片的标识时,处理单元1302用于:将第二会话去激活。In another possible example, the communication device 1300 can be used to implement the actions of the fifth device in Figure 8, Figure 9 or Figure 10. The communication unit 1301 is used to: receive a switching request, the switching request is used to request to switch the second session to the sixth device; the network slice associated with the second session is the first network slice, and the second session is used to provide the terminal device with a service corresponding to the second network slice; the fifth device is a core network device; the sixth device is a management device of the first cell, and the list of network slices supported by the first cell includes the identifier of the first network slice; when the network slice list does not include the identifier of the second network slice, the processing unit 1302 is used to: deactivate the second session.

在一种可能的设计中,处理单元1302还用于:确定第二网络切片为允许在终端设备的注册区域中部分区域内使用的网络切片;或者,处理单元1302还用于:确定第二网络切片为不允许在注册区域中部分区域内使用的网络切片。In one possible design, the processing unit 1302 is also used to: determine that the second network slice is a network slice that is allowed to be used in a partial area of the registration area of the terminal device; or, the processing unit 1302 is also used to: determine that the second network slice is a network slice that is not allowed to be used in a partial area of the registration area.

在一种可能的设计中,通信单元1301还用于:接收来自第六设备的第七消息;第七消息用于指示第六设备对第二会话的预处理方式为允许准入;当网络切片列表不包括第二网络切片的标识时,处理单元1302还用于:响应于第七消息将第二会话去激活。In one possible design, the communication unit 1301 is also used to: receive a seventh message from a sixth device; the seventh message is used to indicate that the sixth device's preprocessing method for the second session is to allow access; when the network slice list does not include the identifier of the second network slice, the processing unit 1302 is also used to: deactivate the second session in response to the seventh message.

在一种可能的设计中,通信单元1301还用于:在接收来自第六设备的切换请求后,向第六设备发送第四信息;第四信息用于指示释放第二会话的准入资源。In a possible design, the communication unit 1301 is further used to: after receiving a switching request from a sixth device, send fourth information to the sixth device; the fourth information is used to indicate the release of access resources for the second session.

在一种可能的设计中,当切换请求用于请求将第二会话从第七设备切换至第六设备时,通信单元1301还用于:接收来自第七设备的切换请求,通信单元1301还用于:向第七设备发送第五信息,第五信息用于指示释放前述第七设备为第二会话分配的资源。In one possible design, when the switching request is used to request switching the second session from the seventh device to the sixth device, the communication unit 1301 is also used to: receive a switching request from the seventh device, and the communication unit 1301 is also used to: send fifth information to the seventh device, and the fifth information is used to indicate the release of resources allocated by the aforementioned seventh device for the second session.

基于相同的技术构思,本申请实施例还提供了另一种通信装置,所述通信设备1400可以实现以上实施例提供的通信方法,具有以上实施例提供的通信装置1300的功能。参阅图14所示,所述通信设备1400包括:存储器1402、处理器1401。可选的,所述通信设备1400还包括通信接口1403。其中,所 述通信接口1403、所述处理器1401以及所述存储器1402之间相互连接。Based on the same technical concept, the embodiment of the present application also provides another communication device, the communication device 1400 can implement the communication method provided in the above embodiment, and has the functions of the communication device 1300 provided in the above embodiment. Referring to FIG. 14, the communication device 1400 includes: a memory 1402 and a processor 1401. Optionally, the communication device 1400 also includes a communication interface 1403. The communication interface 1403, the processor 1401 and the memory 1402 are connected to each other.

可选的,所述通信接口1403、所述处理器1401以及所述存储器1402之间通过总线1404相互连接。所述总线1404可以是外设部件互连标准(peripheral component interconnect,PCI)总线或扩展工业标准结构(extended industry standard architecture,EISA)总线等。所述总线可以分为地址总线、数据总线、控制总线等。为便于表示,图14中仅用一条粗线表示,但并不表示仅有一根总线或一种类型的总线。Optionally, the communication interface 1403, the processor 1401 and the memory 1402 are interconnected via a bus 1404. The bus 1404 may be a peripheral component interconnect (PCI) bus or an extended industry standard architecture (EISA) bus. The bus may be divided into an address bus, a data bus, a control bus, etc. For ease of representation, FIG14 is represented by only one thick line, but it does not mean that there is only one bus or one type of bus.

所述通信接口1403,用于接收和发送信号,实现与通信装置以外的其他设备之间的通信。The communication interface 1403 is used to receive and send signals to achieve communication with other devices other than the communication device.

所述处理器1401的功能可以参照以上实施例中的描述,此处不再赘述。其中,处理器1401可以是中央处理器(central processing unit,CPU),网络处理器(network processor,NP)或者CPU和NP的组合等等。处理器1401还可以进一步包括硬件芯片。上述硬件芯片可以是专用集成电路(application-specific integrated circuit,ASIC),可编程逻辑器件(programmable logic device,PLD)或其组合。上述PLD可以是复杂可编程逻辑器件(complex programmable logic device,CPLD),现场可编程逻辑门阵列(field-programmable gate array,FPGA),通用阵列逻辑(generic array logic,GAL)或其任意组合。处理器1401在实现上述功能时,可以通过硬件实现,当然也可以通过硬件执行相应的软件实现。The functions of the processor 1401 can refer to the description in the above embodiments, and will not be repeated here. Among them, the processor 1401 can be a central processing unit (CPU), a network processor (NP) or a combination of CPU and NP, etc. The processor 1401 can further include a hardware chip. The above-mentioned hardware chip can be an application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a programmable logic device (PLD) or a combination thereof. The above-mentioned PLD can be a complex programmable logic device (CPLD), a field-programmable gate array (FPGA), a generic array logic (GAL) or any combination thereof. When the processor 1401 realizes the above-mentioned functions, it can be realized by hardware, and of course, it can also be realized by executing the corresponding software through hardware.

所述存储器1402,用于存放程序指令等。具体地,程序指令可以包括程序代码,该程序代码包括计算机操作指令。存储器1402可能包含随机存取存储器(random access memory,RAM),也可能还包括非易失性存储器(non-volatile memory),例如至少一个磁盘存储器。处理器1401执行存储器1402所存放的程序指令,实现上述功能,从而实现上述实施例提供的方法。示例性的,存储器1402可以包括本申请实施例所示的第一设备、第二设备、第三设备、第四设备、第五设备、第六设备或第七设备。The memory 1402 is used to store program instructions, etc. Specifically, the program instructions may include program codes, which include computer operation instructions. The memory 1402 may include random access memory (RAM), and may also include non-volatile memory (non-volatile memory), such as at least one disk storage. The processor 1401 executes the program instructions stored in the memory 1402 to implement the above functions, thereby implementing the method provided in the above embodiment. Exemplarily, the memory 1402 may include the first device, the second device, the third device, the fourth device, the fifth device, the sixth device or the seventh device shown in the embodiment of the present application.

基于相同的技术构思,本申请实施例还提供了一种计算机程序,当所述计算机程序在计算机上运行时,使得所述计算机执行以上实施例提供的方法。Based on the same technical concept, an embodiment of the present application further provides a computer program, which, when executed on a computer, enables the computer to execute the method provided in the above embodiment.

基于相同的技术构思,本申请实施例还提供了一种计算机可读存储介质,该计算机可读存储介质中存储有计算机程序,当所述计算机程序在计算机上运行时,使得所述计算机执行以上实施例提供的方法。Based on the same technical concept, an embodiment of the present application further provides a computer-readable storage medium, in which a computer program is stored. When the computer program runs on a computer, the computer executes the method provided in the above embodiment.

其中,存储介质可以是计算机能够存取的任何可用介质。以此为例但不限于:计算机可读介质可以包括RAM、ROM、EEPROM、CD-ROM或其他光盘存储、磁盘存储介质或者其他磁存储设备、或者能够用于携带或存储具有指令或数据结构形式的期望的程序代码并能够由计算机存取的任何其他介质。The storage medium may be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer. For example, but not limited to, a computer-readable medium may include RAM, ROM, EEPROM, CD-ROM or other optical disk storage, magnetic disk storage medium or other magnetic storage device, or any other medium that can be used to carry or store the desired program code in the form of instructions or data structures and can be accessed by a computer.

基于相同的技术构思,本申请实施例还提供了一种芯片,所述芯片用于读取存储器中存储的计算机程序,实现以上实施例提供的方法。Based on the same technical concept, an embodiment of the present application further provides a chip, which is used to read a computer program stored in a memory to implement the method provided in the above embodiment.

本领域内的技术人员应明白,本申请的实施例可提供为方法、系统、或计算机程序产品。因此,本申请可采用完全硬件实施例、完全软件实施例、或结合软件和硬件方面的实施例的形式。而且,本申请可采用在一个或多个其中包含有计算机可用程序代码的计算机可用存储介质(包括但不限于磁盘存储器、CD-ROM、光学存储器等)上实施的计算机程序产品的形式。Those skilled in the art will appreciate that the embodiments of the present application may be provided as methods, systems, or computer program products. Therefore, the present application may adopt the form of a complete hardware embodiment, a complete software embodiment, or an embodiment in combination with software and hardware. Moreover, the present application may adopt the form of a computer program product implemented in one or more computer-usable storage media (including but not limited to disk storage, CD-ROM, optical storage, etc.) that include computer-usable program code.

本申请是参照根据本申请的方法、设备(系统)、和计算机程序产品的流程图和/或方框图来描述的。应理解可由计算机程序指令实现流程图和/或方框图中的每一流程和/或方框、以及流程图和/或方框图中的流程和/或方框的结合。可提供这些计算机程序指令到通用计算机、专用计算机、嵌入式处理机或其他可编程数据处理设备的处理器以产生一个机器,使得通过计算机或其他可编程数据处理设备的处理器执行的指令产生用于实现在流程图一个流程或多个流程和/或方框图一个方框或多个方框中指定的功能的装置。The present application is described with reference to the flowchart and/or block diagram of the method, device (system), and computer program product according to the present application. It should be understood that each process and/or box in the flowchart and/or block diagram, as well as the combination of the process and/or box in the flowchart and/or block diagram can be implemented by computer program instructions. These computer program instructions can be provided to a processor of a general-purpose computer, a special-purpose computer, an embedded processor or other programmable data processing device to produce a machine, so that the instructions executed by the processor of the computer or other programmable data processing device produce a device for implementing the function specified in one process or multiple processes in the flowchart and/or one box or multiple boxes in the block diagram.

这些计算机程序指令也可存储在能引导计算机或其他可编程数据处理设备以特定方式工作的计算机可读存储器中,使得存储在该计算机可读存储器中的指令产生包括指令装置的制造品,该指令装置实现在流程图一个流程或多个流程和/或方框图一个方框或多个方框中指定的功能。These computer program instructions may also be stored in a computer-readable memory that can direct a computer or other programmable data processing device to work in a specific manner, so that the instructions stored in the computer-readable memory produce a manufactured product including an instruction device that implements the functions specified in one or more processes in the flowchart and/or one or more boxes in the block diagram.

这些计算机程序指令也可装载到计算机或其他可编程数据处理设备上,使得在计算机或其他可编程设备上执行一系列操作步骤以产生计算机实现的处理,从而在计算机或其他可编程设备上执行的指令提供用于实现在流程图一个流程或多个流程和/或方框图一个方框或多个方框中指定的功能的步骤。These computer program instructions may also be loaded onto a computer or other programmable data processing device so that a series of operational steps are executed on the computer or other programmable device to produce a computer-implemented process, whereby the instructions executed on the computer or other programmable device provide steps for implementing the functions specified in one or more processes in the flowchart and/or one or more boxes in the block diagram.

显然,本领域的技术人员可以对本申请进行各种改动和变型而不脱离本申请的精神和范围。这样,倘若本申请的这些修改和变型属于本申请权利要求及其等同技术的范围之内,则本申请也意图包含这些改动和变型在内。 Obviously, those skilled in the art can make various changes and modifications to the present application without departing from the spirit and scope of the present application. Thus, if these modifications and variations of the present application fall within the scope of the claims of the present application and their equivalents, the present application is also intended to include these modifications and variations.

Claims (32)

一种通信方法,其特征在于,所述方法包括:A communication method, characterized in that the method comprises: 第一设备接收来自第二设备的切换请求;所述切换请求用于请求将第一会话切换至所述第一设备;所述第一会话关联的网络切片为第一网络切片,且所述第一会话用于为终端设备提供第二网络切片对应的服务;所述第一设备为第一小区的管理设备,所述第一小区支持的网络切片列表包括所述第一网络切片的标识,且不包括所述第二网络切片的标识;The first device receives a switching request from the second device; the switching request is used to request to switch a first session to the first device; the network slice associated with the first session is the first network slice, and the first session is used to provide a service corresponding to the second network slice for the terminal device; the first device is a management device of a first cell, and the list of network slices supported by the first cell includes an identifier of the first network slice, but does not include an identifier of the second network slice; 所述第一设备接收来自所述第二设备的第一信息;所述第一信息用于指示对所述第一会话的处理方式为拒绝准入或者去激活。The first device receives first information from the second device; the first information is used to indicate that a processing method for the first session is to deny admission or deactivate. 如权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 1, characterized in that the method further comprises: 所述第一设备根据所述第一信息,对所述第一会话进行拒绝准入或者去激活的操作。The first device denies admission to or deactivates the first session according to the first information. 如权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一信息包括所述第二网络切片的标识,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 1, wherein the first information includes an identifier of the second network slice, and the method further comprises: 当所述网络切片列表不包括所述第二网络切片的标识时,所述第一设备对所述第一会话进行拒绝准入或者去激活的操作。When the network slice list does not include the identifier of the second network slice, the first device denies admission to or deactivates the first session. 如权利要求3所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一信息还包括:至少一个第一类网络切片的标识或者至少一个第二类网络切片的标识;所述第一类网络切片为允许在所述终端设备的注册区域中部分区域内使用的网络切片,所述第二类网络切片为不允许在所述注册区域中部分区域内使用的网络切片;所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 3 is characterized in that the first information further includes: an identifier of at least one first-type network slice or an identifier of at least one second-type network slice; the first-type network slice is a network slice that is allowed to be used in a part of the registration area of the terminal device, and the second-type network slice is a network slice that is not allowed to be used in a part of the registration area; the method further includes: 所述第一设备确定所述至少一个第一类网络切片的标识包括所述第二网络切片的标识;The first device determines that the identifier of the at least one first-type network slice includes the identifier of the second network slice; 或者,所述第一设备确定所述至少一个第二类网络切片的标识包括所述第二网络切片的标识。Alternatively, the first device determines that the identifier of the at least one second-type network slice includes the identifier of the second network slice. 如权利要求1-4中任一所述的方法,其特征在于,当所述终端设备从第二小区移动至所述第一小区时,所述第二设备为所述第二小区的管理设备,第三设备为核心网设备。The method as described in any one of claims 1-4 is characterized in that when the terminal device moves from the second cell to the first cell, the second device is a management device of the second cell, and the third device is a core network device. 如权利要求5所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 5, characterized in that the method further comprises: 所述第一设备根据所述第一信息,向所述第二设备发送第一消息;所述第一消息用于指示所述第一设备对所述第一会话的处理方式为拒绝准入或者去激活;The first device sends a first message to the second device according to the first information; the first message is used to indicate that the first device processes the first session in a manner of denying access or deactivating; 所述第一设备向所述第三设备发送第二消息;所述第二消息用于指示所述第一会话的资源建立失败。The first device sends a second message to the third device; the second message is used to indicate that resource establishment of the first session fails. 如权利要求5所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 5, characterized in that the method further comprises: 所述第一设备向所述第二设备发送第三消息;所述第三消息用于指示所述第一设备对所述第一会话的处理方式为允许准入;The first device sends a third message to the second device; the third message is used to indicate that the first device processes the first session in a manner of allowing access; 所述第一设备根据所述第一信息,向所述第三设备发送第四消息;所述第四消息用于指示所述第一会话的资源建立失败。The first device sends a fourth message to the third device according to the first information; the fourth message is used to indicate that resource establishment of the first session fails. 如权利要求6或7所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 6 or 7, characterized in that the method further comprises: 所述第一设备接收来自所述第三设备的第一响应消息;所述第一响应消息用于指示释放所述第一会话的准入资源。The first device receives a first response message from the third device; the first response message is used to indicate the release of admission resources of the first session. 如权利要求5所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 5, characterized in that the method further comprises: 所述第一设备向所述第二设备发送第三消息;所述第三消息用于指示所述第一设备对所述第一会话的处理方式为允许准入;The first device sends a third message to the second device; the third message is used to indicate that the first device processes the first session in a manner of allowing access; 所述第一设备向所述第三设备发送第八消息;所述第八消息用于指示所述第一会话的资源建立成功;The first device sends an eighth message to the third device; the eighth message is used to indicate that resources of the first session are successfully established; 所述第一设备接收来自所述第三设备的第二响应消息,所述第二响应消息用于指示释放所述第一会 话的准入资源。The first device receives a second response message from the third device, wherein the second response message is used to indicate the release of the first session Access resources for calls. 如权利要求1-4中任一所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二设备为核心网设备。The method according to any one of claims 1-4 is characterized in that the second device is a core network device. 如权利要求10所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 10, characterized in that the method further comprises: 所述第一设备根据所述第一信息,向所述第二设备发送第五消息;所述第五消息用于指示所述第一设备对所述第一会话的处理方式为拒绝准入或者去激活。The first device sends a fifth message to the second device according to the first information; the fifth message is used to indicate that the first device handles the first session in a manner of denying admission or deactivating. 如权利要求10所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 10, characterized in that the method further comprises: 所述第一设备向所述第二设备发送第六消息;所述第六消息用于指示所述第一设备对所述第一会话的处理方式为允许准入。The first device sends a sixth message to the second device; the sixth message is used to indicate that the first device processes the first session in a manner of allowing access. 一种通信方法,其特征在于,所述方法包括:A communication method, characterized in that the method comprises: 第二设备向第一设备发送的切换请求;所述切换请求用于请求将第一会话切换至所述第一设备;所述第一会话关联的网络切片为第一网络切片,且所述第一会话用于为终端设备提供第二网络切片对应的服务;所述第一设备为第一小区的管理设备,所述第一小区支持的网络切片列表包括所述第一网络切片的标识;A handover request sent by the second device to the first device; the handover request is used to request to switch the first session to the first device; the network slice associated with the first session is the first network slice, and the first session is used to provide the terminal device with a service corresponding to the second network slice; the first device is a management device of the first cell, and the list of network slices supported by the first cell includes an identifier of the first network slice; 当所述网络切片列表不包括所述第二网络切片的标识时,所述第二设备向所述第一设备发送第一信息;所述第一信息用于指示对所述第一会话的处理方式为拒绝准入或者去激活。When the network slice list does not include the identifier of the second network slice, the second device sends first information to the first device; the first information is used to indicate that the processing method for the first session is to deny access or deactivate. 如权利要求13所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一信息还包括所述第二网络切片的标识。The method as claimed in claim 13 is characterized in that the first information also includes an identifier of the second network slice. 如权利要求13或14所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一信息还包括:至少一个第一类网络切片的标识或者至少一个第二类网络切片的标识;所述第一类网络切片为允许在所述终端设备的注册区域中部分区域内使用的网络切片,所述第二类网络切片为不允许在所述注册区域中部分区域内使用的网络切片。The method as claimed in claim 13 or 14 is characterized in that the first information also includes: an identifier of at least one first-class network slice or an identifier of at least one second-class network slice; the first-class network slice is a network slice that is allowed to be used in a part of the registration area of the terminal device, and the second-class network slice is a network slice that is not allowed to be used in a part of the registration area. 如权利要求13-15中任一所述的方法,其特征在于,当所述终端设备从第二小区移动至所述第一小区时,所述第二设备为所述第二小区的管理设备。The method as described in any one of claims 13-15 is characterized in that when the terminal device moves from the second cell to the first cell, the second device is a management device of the second cell. 如权利要求16所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 16, characterized in that the method further comprises: 所述第二设备接收来自所述终端设备的第二信息;所述第二信息包括所述第二网络切片的标识;所述第二网络切片为允许在所述终端设备的注册区域中部分区域内使用的网络切片,或者,所述第二网络切片为不允许在所述注册区域中部分区域内使用的网络切片。The second device receives second information from the terminal device; the second information includes an identifier of the second network slice; the second network slice is a network slice that is allowed to be used in a part of the registration area of the terminal device, or the second network slice is a network slice that is not allowed to be used in a part of the registration area. 如权利要求16或17所述的方法,其特征在于,第三设备为核心网设备,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 16 or 17, wherein the third device is a core network device, and the method further comprises: 所述第二设备接收来自所述第三设备的第三信息;所述第三信息包括所述第二网络切片的标识,所述第三信息还包括至少一个第一类网络切片的标识和/或至少一个第二类网络切片列表的标识;所述第一类网络切片为允许在所述终端设备的注册区域中部分区域内使用的网络切片,所述第二类网络切片为不允许在所述注册区域中部分区域内使用的网络切片;The second device receives third information from the third device; the third information includes an identifier of the second network slice, and the third information also includes an identifier of at least one first-type network slice and/or an identifier of at least one second-type network slice list; the first-type network slice is a network slice that is allowed to be used in a part of the registration area of the terminal device, and the second-type network slice is a network slice that is not allowed to be used in a part of the registration area; 所述第二设备确定所述至少一个第一类网络切片的标识包括所述第二网络切片的标识;或者,所述第二设备确定所述至少一个第二类网络切片的标识包括所述第二网络切片的标识。The second device determines that the identifier of the at least one first-type network slice includes the identifier of the second network slice; or, the second device determines that the identifier of the at least one second-type network slice includes the identifier of the second network slice. 如权利要求13-18中任一所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 13 to 18, characterized in that the method further comprises: 所述第二设备接收来自所述第一设备的第一消息;所述第一消息用于指示所述第一设备对所述第一会话的处理方式为拒绝准入或者去激活。The second device receives a first message from the first device; the first message is used to indicate that the first device handles the first session in a manner of denying admission or deactivating. 如权利要求13-19中任一所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括: The method according to any one of claims 13 to 19, characterized in that the method further comprises: 所述第二设备接收来自所述第一设备的第三消息;所述第三消息用于指示所述第一设备对所述第一会话的处理方式为允许准入。The second device receives a third message from the first device; the third message is used to indicate that the first device should allow access to the first session. 如权利要求13-15中任一所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二设备为核心网设备。The method as described in any one of claims 13-15 is characterized in that the second device is a core network device. 如权利要求21所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 21, characterized in that the method further comprises: 所述第二设备确定所述第二网络切片为允许在所述终端设备的注册区域中部分区域内使用的网络切片;或者,所述第二设备确定所述第二网络切片为不允许在所述注册区域中部分区域内使用的网络切片。The second device determines that the second network slice is a network slice that is allowed to be used in a partial area of the registration area of the terminal device; or, the second device determines that the second network slice is a network slice that is not allowed to be used in a partial area of the registration area. 如权利要求21或22所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 21 or 22, characterized in that the method further comprises: 所述第二设备接收来自所述第一设备的第五消息;所述第五消息用于指示所述第一设备对所述第一会话的处理方式为拒绝准入或者去激活。The second device receives a fifth message from the first device; the fifth message is used to indicate that the first device handles the first session in a manner of denying admission or deactivating. 如权利要求21或22所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 21 or 22, characterized in that the method further comprises: 所述第二设备接收来自所述第一设备的第六消息;所述第六消息用于指示所述第一设备对所述第一会话的处理方式为允许准入。The second device receives a sixth message from the first device; the sixth message is used to indicate that the first device processes the first session in a manner of allowing access. 如权利要求21-24中任一所述方法,其特征在于,当所述终端设备从第三小区移动至所述第一小区时,第四设备为所述第三小区的管理设备,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 21 to 24, characterized in that when the terminal device moves from the third cell to the first cell, the fourth device is a management device of the third cell, and the method further comprises: 所述第二设备接收来自所述第四设备的所述切换请求;The second device receives the switching request from the fourth device; 所述第二设备向所述第四设备发送第三响应消息;所述第三响应消息用于指示对所述第一会话的处理方式为拒绝准入或者去激活。The second device sends a third response message to the fourth device; the third response message is used to indicate that the processing method for the first session is to deny admission or deactivate. 如权利要求21-25中任一所述的方法,其特征在于,当所述终端设备从第三小区移动至所述第一小区时,第四设备为所述第三小区的管理设备,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 21 to 25, characterized in that when the terminal device moves from the third cell to the first cell, the fourth device is a management device of the third cell, and the method further comprises: 所述第二设备接收来自所述第四设备的所述第一信息。The second device receives the first information from the fourth device. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括:通信单元和处理单元;A communication device, characterized in that it comprises: a communication unit and a processing unit; 所述通信单元,用于接收和发送数据;The communication unit is used to receive and send data; 所述处理单元,用于执行如权利要求1-26中任一项所述的方法。The processing unit is used to execute the method as described in any one of claims 1-26. 一种通信设备,其特征在于,包括:至少一个处理器和存储器;A communication device, characterized in that it comprises: at least one processor and a memory; 所述至少一个处理器与所述存储器耦合,所述至少一个处理器用于读取所述存储器所存储的计算机程序,以执行如权利要求1-26中任一项所述的方法。The at least one processor is coupled to the memory, and the at least one processor is configured to read the computer program stored in the memory to execute the method according to any one of claims 1 to 26. 一种计算机可读存储介质,其特征在于,所述计算机可读存储介质存储有计算机可执行指令,所述计算机可执行指令在被计算机调用时,使所述计算机执行如权利要求1-26中任一项所述的方法。A computer-readable storage medium, characterized in that the computer-readable storage medium stores computer-executable instructions, and when the computer-executable instructions are called by a computer, the computer executes the method as described in any one of claims 1-26. 一种芯片系统,其特征在于,包括通信接口和处理器:A chip system, characterized by comprising a communication interface and a processor: 所述通信接口,用于输入和/或输出信令或数据;The communication interface is used to input and/or output signaling or data; 所述处理器,用于执行计算机可执行程序,使得安装有所述芯片系统的设备执行如权利要求1-26中任一项所述的方法。The processor is used to execute a computer executable program so that a device equipped with the chip system executes a method as described in any one of claims 1 to 26. 一种计算机程序产品,其特征在于,所述计算机程序产品中存储有计算机可执行指令,所述计算机可执行指令在被计算机调用时,使所述计算机执行如权利要求1-26中任一项所述的方法。A computer program product, characterized in that computer executable instructions are stored in the computer program product, and when the computer executable instructions are called by a computer, the computer executes the method as described in any one of claims 1-26. 一种通信系统,其特征在于,包括第一设备和第二设备,所述第一设备用于执行如权利要求1-12中任一项所述的方法,所述第二设备用于执行如权利要求13-26中任一项所述的方法。 A communication system, characterized in that it includes a first device and a second device, wherein the first device is used to execute the method as described in any one of claims 1-12, and the second device is used to execute the method as described in any one of claims 13-26.
PCT/CN2024/121580 2023-09-27 2024-09-26 Communication method and apparatus Pending WO2025067375A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN202311282891.XA CN119729654A (en) 2023-09-27 2023-09-27 Communication method and device
CN202311282891.X 2023-09-27

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2025067375A1 true WO2025067375A1 (en) 2025-04-03

Family

ID=95079671

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2024/121580 Pending WO2025067375A1 (en) 2023-09-27 2024-09-26 Communication method and apparatus

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN119729654A (en)
WO (1) WO2025067375A1 (en)

Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2022035205A1 (en) * 2020-08-13 2022-02-17 엘지전자 주식회사 Communication related to network slice
CN115190647A (en) * 2021-04-01 2022-10-14 维沃移动通信有限公司 Slice access method, network side equipment and terminal
US20230085130A1 (en) * 2020-05-20 2023-03-16 Ofinno, Llc Network Slice
CN116195281A (en) * 2021-01-21 2023-05-30 华为技术有限公司 Wireless communication method, communication device and communication system

Patent Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20230085130A1 (en) * 2020-05-20 2023-03-16 Ofinno, Llc Network Slice
WO2022035205A1 (en) * 2020-08-13 2022-02-17 엘지전자 주식회사 Communication related to network slice
CN116195281A (en) * 2021-01-21 2023-05-30 华为技术有限公司 Wireless communication method, communication device and communication system
CN115190647A (en) * 2021-04-01 2022-10-14 维沃移动通信有限公司 Slice access method, network side equipment and terminal

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN119729654A (en) 2025-03-28

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US12219651B2 (en) Communication method, source base station, target base station, core network device, and terminal device
US12483476B2 (en) Slice control method and apparatus
WO2020057401A1 (en) Method and apparatus for selecting network element
CN114885385A (en) Communication method and device
US20230209450A1 (en) Mobility management method and apparatus
CN117460058A (en) User equipment and method thereof
WO2022067643A1 (en) Cell selection method and apparatus, and paging method and apparatus
US20230345347A1 (en) Method for determining mec access point and apparatus
WO2021134601A1 (en) Method and apparatus for establishing session
CN114205883A (en) Network slice remapping method, device and storage medium
WO2022001318A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus
WO2022033543A1 (en) Relay communication method, and communication apparatus
WO2022155853A1 (en) Wireless communication method, communication apparatus and communication system
TWI775811B (en) Communication method, auxiliary network node, and terminal
CN111757312A (en) A session processing method and device
EP4408057A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus
CN111586766A (en) A communication method, device and system
CN116939505A (en) A communication method and device
WO2025067375A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus
WO2023065865A1 (en) Communication method and device
US20250365342A1 (en) Method for selecting edge application server and apparatus
US20230217540A1 (en) Ma pdu deactivation procedure for ma pdu with pdn leg
CN111526560B (en) Method and device for updating service cell information
WO2023237046A1 (en) Mobility management method for iab node, and related device
WO2025055627A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 24870914

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1